mirror of
https://github.com/AuxXxilium/linux_dsm_epyc7002.git
synced 2024-11-25 03:00:53 +07:00
Merge branch 'linus' into tracing-v28-for-linus-v3
Conflicts: init/main.c kernel/module.c scripts/bootgraph.pl
This commit is contained in:
commit
3e10e879a8
@ -21,6 +21,9 @@ Changes
|
||||
- list of changes that break older software packages.
|
||||
CodingStyle
|
||||
- how the boss likes the C code in the kernel to look.
|
||||
development-process/
|
||||
- An extended tutorial on how to work with the kernel development
|
||||
process.
|
||||
DMA-API.txt
|
||||
- DMA API, pci_ API & extensions for non-consistent memory machines.
|
||||
DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
|
||||
|
62
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc
Normal file
62
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
|
||||
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/interface_capabilities
|
||||
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/device_capabilities
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
These files show the various USB TMC capabilities as described
|
||||
by the device itself. The full description of the bitfields
|
||||
can be found in the USB TMC documents from the USB-IF entitled
|
||||
"Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class Specification
|
||||
(USBTMC) Revision 1.0" section 4.2.1.8.
|
||||
|
||||
The files are read only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/usb488_interface_capabilities
|
||||
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/usb488_device_capabilities
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
These files show the various USB TMC capabilities as described
|
||||
by the device itself. The full description of the bitfields
|
||||
can be found in the USB TMC documents from the USB-IF entitled
|
||||
"Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class, Subclass
|
||||
USB488 Specification (USBTMC-USB488) Revision 1.0" section
|
||||
4.2.2.
|
||||
|
||||
The files are read only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/TermChar
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
This file is the TermChar value to be sent to the USB TMC
|
||||
device as described by the document, "Universal Serial Bus Test
|
||||
and Measurement Class Specification
|
||||
(USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as published by the USB-IF.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that the TermCharEnabled file determines if this value is
|
||||
sent to the device or not.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/TermCharEnabled
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
This file determines if the TermChar is to be sent to the
|
||||
device on every transaction or not. For more details about
|
||||
this, please see the document, "Universal Serial Bus Test and
|
||||
Measurement Class Specification (USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as
|
||||
published by the USB-IF.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/auto_abort
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
This file determines if the the transaction of the USB TMC
|
||||
device is to be automatically aborted if there is any error.
|
||||
For more details about this, please see the document,
|
||||
"Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class Specification
|
||||
(USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as published by the USB-IF.
|
@ -85,3 +85,19 @@ Description:
|
||||
Users:
|
||||
PowerTOP <power@bughost.org>
|
||||
http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/powertop/
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/bus/usb/device/<busnum>-<devnum>...:<config num>-<interface num>/supports_autosuspend
|
||||
Date: January 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
|
||||
Contact: Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
When read, this file returns 1 if the interface driver
|
||||
for this interface supports autosuspend. It also
|
||||
returns 1 if no driver has claimed this interface, as an
|
||||
unclaimed interface will not stop the device from being
|
||||
autosuspended if all other interface drivers are idle.
|
||||
The file returns 0 if autosuspend support has not been
|
||||
added to the driver.
|
||||
Users:
|
||||
USB PM tool
|
||||
git://git.moblin.org/users/sarah/usb-pm-tool/
|
||||
|
43
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg
Normal file
43
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
|
||||
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../powered
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
|
||||
Description: Controls whether the device's display will powered.
|
||||
A value of 0 is off and a non-zero value is on.
|
||||
|
||||
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_msb
|
||||
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_lsb
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
|
||||
Description: Controls the devices display mode.
|
||||
For a 6 character display the values are
|
||||
MSB 0x06; LSB 0x3F, and
|
||||
for an 8 character display the values are
|
||||
MSB 0x08; LSB 0xFF.
|
||||
|
||||
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../textmode
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
|
||||
Description: Controls the way the device interprets its text buffer.
|
||||
raw: each character controls its segment manually
|
||||
hex: each character is between 0-15
|
||||
ascii: each character is between '0'-'9' and 'A'-'F'.
|
||||
|
||||
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../text
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
|
||||
Description: The text (or data) for the device to display
|
||||
|
||||
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals
|
||||
Date: August 2008
|
||||
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
|
||||
Description: Controls the decimal places on the device.
|
||||
To set the nth decimal place, give this field
|
||||
the value of 10 ** n. Assume this field has
|
||||
the value k and has 1 or more decimal places set,
|
||||
to set the mth place (where m is not already set),
|
||||
change this fields value to k + 10 ** m.
|
@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../state
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
state. This holds the regulator output state.
|
||||
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../type
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
type. This holds the regulator type.
|
||||
@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting
|
||||
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit
|
||||
@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting.
|
||||
@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
|
||||
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
|
||||
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
|
||||
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
|
||||
@ -157,10 +157,23 @@ Description:
|
||||
platform code.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../name
|
||||
Date: October 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.28
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
name. This holds a string identifying the regulator for
|
||||
display purposes.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will be empty if no suitable name is provided
|
||||
by platform or regulator drivers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that
|
||||
@ -170,7 +183,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load
|
||||
@ -181,7 +194,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../parent
|
||||
Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent.
|
||||
This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists.
|
||||
@ -189,7 +202,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
|
||||
@ -203,7 +216,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
|
||||
@ -217,7 +230,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
|
||||
@ -231,7 +244,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
|
||||
@ -245,7 +258,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
|
||||
@ -258,7 +271,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
|
||||
@ -272,7 +285,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state
|
||||
@ -287,7 +300,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state
|
||||
@ -302,7 +315,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating
|
||||
|
13
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling
Normal file
13
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
|
||||
What: /sys/kernel/profile
|
||||
Date: September 2008
|
||||
Contact: Dave Hansen <dave@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
/sys/kernel/profile is the runtime equivalent
|
||||
of the boot-time profile= option.
|
||||
|
||||
You can get the same effect running:
|
||||
|
||||
echo 2 > /sys/kernel/profile
|
||||
|
||||
as you would by issuing profile=2 on the boot
|
||||
command line.
|
@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
|
||||
# To add a new book the only step required is to add the book to the
|
||||
# list of DOCBOOKS.
|
||||
|
||||
DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \
|
||||
DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \
|
||||
kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
|
||||
procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \
|
||||
kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
|
||||
|
@ -557,6 +557,9 @@ Near-term plans include converting all of them, except for "gadgetfs".
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_acm.c
|
||||
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_ecm.c
|
||||
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_subset.c
|
||||
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_obex.c
|
||||
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_serial.c
|
||||
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
|
@ -14,17 +14,20 @@
|
||||
<othername>(J.A.K.)</othername>
|
||||
<surname>Mouw</surname>
|
||||
<affiliation>
|
||||
<orgname>Delft University of Technology</orgname>
|
||||
<orgdiv>Faculty of Information Technology and Systems</orgdiv>
|
||||
<address>
|
||||
<email>J.A.K.Mouw@its.tudelft.nl</email>
|
||||
<pob>PO BOX 5031</pob>
|
||||
<postcode>2600 GA</postcode>
|
||||
<city>Delft</city>
|
||||
<country>The Netherlands</country>
|
||||
<email>mouw@nl.linux.org</email>
|
||||
</address>
|
||||
</affiliation>
|
||||
</author>
|
||||
<othercredit>
|
||||
<contrib>
|
||||
This software and documentation were written while working on the
|
||||
LART computing board
|
||||
(<ulink url="http://www.lartmaker.nl/">http://www.lartmaker.nl/</ulink>),
|
||||
which was sponsored by the Delt University of Technology projects
|
||||
Mobile Multi-media Communications and Ubiquitous Communications.
|
||||
</contrib>
|
||||
</othercredit>
|
||||
</authorgroup>
|
||||
|
||||
<revhistory>
|
||||
@ -108,18 +111,6 @@
|
||||
proofreading.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This documentation was written while working on the LART
|
||||
computing board (<ulink
|
||||
url="http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/">http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/</ulink>),
|
||||
which is sponsored by the Mobile Multi-media Communications
|
||||
(<ulink
|
||||
url="http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/">http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/</ulink>)
|
||||
and Ubiquitous Communications (<ulink
|
||||
url="http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/">http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/</ulink>)
|
||||
projects.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Erik
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
@ -1,28 +1,16 @@
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* procfs_example.c: an example proc interface
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright (C) 2001, Erik Mouw (J.A.K.Mouw@its.tudelft.nl)
|
||||
* Copyright (C) 2001, Erik Mouw (mouw@nl.linux.org)
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This file accompanies the procfs-guide in the Linux kernel
|
||||
* source. Its main use is to demonstrate the concepts and
|
||||
* functions described in the guide.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This software has been developed while working on the LART
|
||||
* computing board (http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/), which is
|
||||
* sponsored by the Mobile Multi-media Communications
|
||||
* (http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/) and Ubiquitous Communications
|
||||
* (http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/) projects.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The author can be reached at:
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Erik Mouw
|
||||
* Information and Communication Theory Group
|
||||
* Faculty of Information Technology and Systems
|
||||
* Delft University of Technology
|
||||
* P.O. Box 5031
|
||||
* 2600 GA Delft
|
||||
* The Netherlands
|
||||
*
|
||||
* computing board (http://www.lartmaker.nl), which was sponsored
|
||||
* by the Delt University of Technology projects Mobile Multi-media
|
||||
* Communications and Ubiquitous Communications.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This program is free software; you can redistribute
|
||||
* it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General
|
||||
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ required reading:
|
||||
|
||||
Other excellent descriptions of how to create patches properly are:
|
||||
"The Perfect Patch"
|
||||
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt
|
||||
http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
|
||||
"Linux kernel patch submission format"
|
||||
http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html
|
||||
|
||||
@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ all time. It should describe the patch completely, containing:
|
||||
For more details on what this should all look like, please see the
|
||||
ChangeLog section of the document:
|
||||
"The Perfect Patch"
|
||||
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt
|
||||
http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
|
||||
Linux 2.4.2 Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling
|
||||
18 March 2001, Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>
|
||||
18 March 2001, Andrew Morton
|
||||
|
||||
An operating system's Secure Attention Key is a security tool which is
|
||||
provided as protection against trojan password capturing programs. It
|
||||
|
@ -85,3 +85,6 @@ kernel patches.
|
||||
23: Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure
|
||||
that it still works with all of the other queued patches and various
|
||||
changes in the VM, VFS, and other subsystems.
|
||||
|
||||
24: All memory barriers {e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()} need a comment in the
|
||||
source code that explains the logic of what they are doing and why.
|
||||
|
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Linux 2.4:
|
||||
Linux 2.6:
|
||||
The same rules apply as 2.4 except that you should follow linux-kernel
|
||||
to track changes in API's. The final contact point for Linux 2.6
|
||||
submissions is Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>.
|
||||
submissions is Andrew Morton.
|
||||
|
||||
What Criteria Determine Acceptance
|
||||
----------------------------------
|
||||
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Quilt:
|
||||
http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt
|
||||
|
||||
Andrew Morton's patch scripts:
|
||||
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/
|
||||
http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/patch-scripts.tar.gz
|
||||
Instead of these scripts, quilt is the recommended patch management
|
||||
tool (see above).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ person it names. This tag documents that potentially interested parties
|
||||
have been included in the discussion
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
14) Using Test-by: and Reviewed-by:
|
||||
14) Using Tested-by: and Reviewed-by:
|
||||
|
||||
A Tested-by: tag indicates that the patch has been successfully tested (in
|
||||
some environment) by the person named. This tag informs maintainers that
|
||||
@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ SECTION 3 - REFERENCES
|
||||
----------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
|
||||
<http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt>
|
||||
<http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt>
|
||||
|
||||
Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format".
|
||||
<http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
|
||||
@ -672,4 +672,9 @@ Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle:
|
||||
|
||||
Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format:
|
||||
<http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
|
||||
|
||||
Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches"
|
||||
Some strategies to get difficult or controversal changes in.
|
||||
http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf
|
||||
|
||||
--
|
||||
|
@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
|
||||
A Simple Guide to Configure KGDB
|
||||
|
||||
Sonic Zhang <sonic.zhang@analog.com>
|
||||
Aug. 24th 2006
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This KGDB patch enables the kernel developer to do source level debugging on
|
||||
the kernel for the Blackfin architecture. The debugging works over either the
|
||||
ethernet interface or one of the uarts. Both software breakpoints and
|
||||
hardware breakpoints are supported in this version.
|
||||
http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=kgdb
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2 known issues:
|
||||
1. This bug:
|
||||
http://blackfin.uclinux.org/tracker/index.php?func=detail&aid=544&group_id=18&atid=145
|
||||
The GDB client for Blackfin uClinux causes incorrect values of local
|
||||
variables to be displayed when the user breaks the running of kernel in GDB.
|
||||
2. Because of a hardware bug in Blackfin 533 v1.0.3:
|
||||
05000067 - Watchpoints (Hardware Breakpoints) are not supported
|
||||
Hardware breakpoints cannot be set properly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Debug over Ethernet:
|
||||
|
||||
1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
|
||||
can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
|
||||
|
||||
2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under
|
||||
"Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
|
||||
With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and
|
||||
"Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
|
||||
|
||||
3. Select option "KGDB: connect over (Ethernet)". Add "kgdboe=@target-IP/,@host-IP/" to
|
||||
the option "Compiled-in Kernel Boot Parameter" under "Kernel hacking".
|
||||
|
||||
4. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image.
|
||||
|
||||
5. Configure the IP "/> ifconfig eth0 target-IP"
|
||||
|
||||
6. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
|
||||
|
||||
7. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote udp:target-IP:6443".
|
||||
|
||||
8. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
|
||||
|
||||
9. Continue "(gdb) c".
|
||||
|
||||
10. Run ls in the target console "/> ls".
|
||||
|
||||
11. Breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
|
||||
|
||||
12. Display local variables and function paramters.
|
||||
(*) This operation gives wrong results, see known issue 1.
|
||||
|
||||
13. Single stepping "(gdb) si".
|
||||
|
||||
14. Remove breakpoint 1. "(gdb) del 1"
|
||||
|
||||
15. Set hardware breakpoint "(gdb) hbreak sys_open".
|
||||
|
||||
16. Continue "(gdb) c".
|
||||
|
||||
17. Run ls in the target console "/> ls".
|
||||
|
||||
18. Hardware breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(...".
|
||||
(*) This hardware breakpoint will not be hit, see known issue 2.
|
||||
|
||||
19. Continue "(gdb) c".
|
||||
|
||||
20. Interrupt the target in GDB "Ctrl+C".
|
||||
|
||||
21. Detach from the target "(gdb) detach".
|
||||
|
||||
22. Exit GDB "(gdb) quit".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Debug over the UART:
|
||||
|
||||
1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
|
||||
can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
|
||||
|
||||
2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under
|
||||
"Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
|
||||
With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and
|
||||
"Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
|
||||
|
||||
3. Select option "KGDB: connect over (UART)". Set "KGDB: UART port number" to be
|
||||
a different one from the console. Don't forget to change the mode of
|
||||
blackfin serial driver to PIO. Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART.
|
||||
|
||||
4. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable
|
||||
"KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early"
|
||||
|
||||
5. Compile kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
6. Connect minicom to the serial port of the console and boot the kernel image.
|
||||
|
||||
7. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
|
||||
|
||||
8. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600".
|
||||
|
||||
9. Connect to the target on the second serial port "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS1".
|
||||
|
||||
10. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
|
||||
|
||||
11. Continue "(gdb) c".
|
||||
|
||||
12. Run ls in the target console "/> ls".
|
||||
|
||||
13. A breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
|
||||
|
||||
14. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Debug over the same UART as console:
|
||||
|
||||
1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
|
||||
can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
|
||||
|
||||
2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under
|
||||
"Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
|
||||
With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and
|
||||
"Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
|
||||
|
||||
3. Select option "KGDB: connect over UART". Set "KGDB: UART port number" to console.
|
||||
Don't forget to change the mode of blackfin serial driver to PIO.
|
||||
Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART.
|
||||
|
||||
4. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable
|
||||
"KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early"
|
||||
|
||||
5. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image.
|
||||
|
||||
6. (Optional) Ask target to wait for gdb connection by entering Ctrl+A. In minicom, you should enter Ctrl+A+A.
|
||||
|
||||
7. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
|
||||
|
||||
8. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600".
|
||||
|
||||
9. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0".
|
||||
|
||||
10. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
|
||||
|
||||
11. Continue "(gdb) c". Then enter Ctrl+C twice to stop GDB connection.
|
||||
|
||||
12. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". Dummy string can be seen on the console.
|
||||
|
||||
13. Then connect the gdb to target again. "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0".
|
||||
Now you will find a breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
|
||||
|
||||
14. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet. The only
|
||||
difference is that after continue command in GDB, please stop GDB
|
||||
connection by 2 "Ctrl+C"s and connect again after breakpoints are hit or
|
||||
Ctrl+A is entered.
|
@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ will require extra work due to the application tag.
|
||||
retrieve the tag buffer using bio_integrity_get_tag().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
6.3 PASSING EXISTING INTEGRITY METADATA
|
||||
5.3 PASSING EXISTING INTEGRITY METADATA
|
||||
|
||||
Filesystems that either generate their own integrity metadata or
|
||||
are capable of transferring IMD from user space can use the
|
||||
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ will require extra work due to the application tag.
|
||||
integrity upon completion.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
6.4 REGISTERING A BLOCK DEVICE AS CAPABLE OF EXCHANGING INTEGRITY
|
||||
5.4 REGISTERING A BLOCK DEVICE AS CAPABLE OF EXCHANGING INTEGRITY
|
||||
METADATA
|
||||
|
||||
To enable integrity exchange on a block device the gendisk must be
|
||||
|
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ operating system.
|
||||
The ETRAX 100LX chip
|
||||
--------------------
|
||||
|
||||
For reference, plase see the press-release:
|
||||
For reference, please see the press-release:
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.axis.com/news/us/001101_etrax.htm
|
||||
|
||||
|
274
Documentation/development-process/1.Intro
Normal file
274
Documentation/development-process/1.Intro
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
|
||||
1: A GUIDE TO THE KERNEL DEVELOPMENT PROCESS
|
||||
|
||||
The purpose of this document is to help developers (and their managers)
|
||||
work with the development community with a minimum of frustration. It is
|
||||
an attempt to document how this community works in a way which is
|
||||
accessible to those who are not intimately familiar with Linux kernel
|
||||
development (or, indeed, free software development in general). While
|
||||
there is some technical material here, this is very much a process-oriented
|
||||
discussion which does not require a deep knowledge of kernel programming to
|
||||
understand.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1.1: EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
|
||||
|
||||
The rest of this section covers the scope of the kernel development process
|
||||
and the kinds of frustrations that developers and their employers can
|
||||
encounter there. There are a great many reasons why kernel code should be
|
||||
merged into the official ("mainline") kernel, including automatic
|
||||
availability to users, community support in many forms, and the ability to
|
||||
influence the direction of kernel development. Code contributed to the
|
||||
Linux kernel must be made available under a GPL-compatible license.
|
||||
|
||||
Section 2 introduces the development process, the kernel release cycle, and
|
||||
the mechanics of the merge window. The various phases in the patch
|
||||
development, review, and merging cycle are covered. There is some
|
||||
discussion of tools and mailing lists. Developers wanting to get started
|
||||
with kernel development are encouraged to track down and fix bugs as an
|
||||
initial exercise.
|
||||
|
||||
Section 3 covers early-stage project planning, with an emphasis on
|
||||
involving the development community as soon as possible.
|
||||
|
||||
Section 4 is about the coding process; several pitfalls which have been
|
||||
encountered by other developers are discussed. Some requirements for
|
||||
patches are covered, and there is an introduction to some of the tools
|
||||
which can help to ensure that kernel patches are correct.
|
||||
|
||||
Section 5 talks about the process of posting patches for review. To be
|
||||
taken seriously by the development community, patches must be properly
|
||||
formatted and described, and they must be sent to the right place.
|
||||
Following the advice in this section should help to ensure the best
|
||||
possible reception for your work.
|
||||
|
||||
Section 6 covers what happens after posting patches; the job is far from
|
||||
done at that point. Working with reviewers is a crucial part of the
|
||||
development process; this section offers a number of tips on how to avoid
|
||||
problems at this important stage. Developers are cautioned against
|
||||
assuming that the job is done when a patch is merged into the mainline.
|
||||
|
||||
Section 7 introduces a couple of "advanced" topics: managing patches with
|
||||
git and reviewing patches posted by others.
|
||||
|
||||
Section 8 concludes the document with pointers to sources for more
|
||||
information on kernel development.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1.2: WHAT THIS DOCUMENT IS ABOUT
|
||||
|
||||
The Linux kernel, at over 6 million lines of code and well over 1000 active
|
||||
contributors, is one of the largest and most active free software projects
|
||||
in existence. Since its humble beginning in 1991, this kernel has evolved
|
||||
into a best-of-breed operating system component which runs on pocket-sized
|
||||
digital music players, desktop PCs, the largest supercomputers in
|
||||
existence, and all types of systems in between. It is a robust, efficient,
|
||||
and scalable solution for almost any situation.
|
||||
|
||||
With the growth of Linux has come an increase in the number of developers
|
||||
(and companies) wishing to participate in its development. Hardware
|
||||
vendors want to ensure that Linux supports their products well, making
|
||||
those products attractive to Linux users. Embedded systems vendors, who
|
||||
use Linux as a component in an integrated product, want Linux to be as
|
||||
capable and well-suited to the task at hand as possible. Distributors and
|
||||
other software vendors who base their products on Linux have a clear
|
||||
interest in the capabilities, performance, and reliability of the Linux
|
||||
kernel. And end users, too, will often wish to change Linux to make it
|
||||
better suit their needs.
|
||||
|
||||
One of the most compelling features of Linux is that it is accessible to
|
||||
these developers; anybody with the requisite skills can improve Linux and
|
||||
influence the direction of its development. Proprietary products cannot
|
||||
offer this kind of openness, which is a characteristic of the free software
|
||||
process. But, if anything, the kernel is even more open than most other
|
||||
free software projects. A typical three-month kernel development cycle can
|
||||
involve over 1000 developers working for more than 100 different companies
|
||||
(or for no company at all).
|
||||
|
||||
Working with the kernel development community is not especially hard. But,
|
||||
that notwithstanding, many potential contributors have experienced
|
||||
difficulties when trying to do kernel work. The kernel community has
|
||||
evolved its own distinct ways of operating which allow it to function
|
||||
smoothly (and produce a high-quality product) in an environment where
|
||||
thousands of lines of code are being changed every day. So it is not
|
||||
surprising that Linux kernel development process differs greatly from
|
||||
proprietary development methods.
|
||||
|
||||
The kernel's development process may come across as strange and
|
||||
intimidating to new developers, but there are good reasons and solid
|
||||
experience behind it. A developer who does not understand the kernel
|
||||
community's ways (or, worse, who tries to flout or circumvent them) will
|
||||
have a frustrating experience in store. The development community, while
|
||||
being helpful to those who are trying to learn, has little time for those
|
||||
who will not listen or who do not care about the development process.
|
||||
|
||||
It is hoped that those who read this document will be able to avoid that
|
||||
frustrating experience. There is a lot of material here, but the effort
|
||||
involved in reading it will be repaid in short order. The development
|
||||
community is always in need of developers who will help to make the kernel
|
||||
better; the following text should help you - or those who work for you -
|
||||
join our community.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1.3: CREDITS
|
||||
|
||||
This document was written by Jonathan Corbet, corbet@lwn.net. It has been
|
||||
improved by comments from Johannes Berg, James Berry, Alex Chiang, Roland
|
||||
Dreier, Randy Dunlap, Jake Edge, Jiri Kosina, Matt Mackall, Arthur Marsh,
|
||||
Amanda McPherson, Andrew Morton, Andrew Price, Tsugikazu Shibata, and
|
||||
Jochen Voß.
|
||||
|
||||
This work was supported by the Linux Foundation; thanks especially to
|
||||
Amanda McPherson, who saw the value of this effort and made it all happen.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1.4: THE IMPORTANCE OF GETTING CODE INTO THE MAINLINE
|
||||
|
||||
Some companies and developers occasionally wonder why they should bother
|
||||
learning how to work with the kernel community and get their code into the
|
||||
mainline kernel (the "mainline" being the kernel maintained by Linus
|
||||
Torvalds and used as a base by Linux distributors). In the short term,
|
||||
contributing code can look like an avoidable expense; it seems easier to
|
||||
just keep the code separate and support users directly. The truth of the
|
||||
matter is that keeping code separate ("out of tree") is a false economy.
|
||||
|
||||
As a way of illustrating the costs of out-of-tree code, here are a few
|
||||
relevant aspects of the kernel development process; most of these will be
|
||||
discussed in greater detail later in this document. Consider:
|
||||
|
||||
- Code which has been merged into the mainline kernel is available to all
|
||||
Linux users. It will automatically be present on all distributions which
|
||||
enable it. There is no need for driver disks, downloads, or the hassles
|
||||
of supporting multiple versions of multiple distributions; it all just
|
||||
works, for the developer and for the user. Incorporation into the
|
||||
mainline solves a large number of distribution and support problems.
|
||||
|
||||
- While kernel developers strive to maintain a stable interface to user
|
||||
space, the internal kernel API is in constant flux. The lack of a stable
|
||||
internal interface is a deliberate design decision; it allows fundamental
|
||||
improvements to be made at any time and results in higher-quality code.
|
||||
But one result of that policy is that any out-of-tree code requires
|
||||
constant upkeep if it is to work with new kernels. Maintaining
|
||||
out-of-tree code requires significant amounts of work just to keep that
|
||||
code working.
|
||||
|
||||
Code which is in the mainline, instead, does not require this work as the
|
||||
result of a simple rule requiring any developer who makes an API change
|
||||
to also fix any code that breaks as the result of that change. So code
|
||||
which has been merged into the mainline has significantly lower
|
||||
maintenance costs.
|
||||
|
||||
- Beyond that, code which is in the kernel will often be improved by other
|
||||
developers. Surprising results can come from empowering your user
|
||||
community and customers to improve your product.
|
||||
|
||||
- Kernel code is subjected to review, both before and after merging into
|
||||
the mainline. No matter how strong the original developer's skills are,
|
||||
this review process invariably finds ways in which the code can be
|
||||
improved. Often review finds severe bugs and security problems. This is
|
||||
especially true for code which has been developed in a closed
|
||||
environment; such code benefits strongly from review by outside
|
||||
developers. Out-of-tree code is lower-quality code.
|
||||
|
||||
- Participation in the development process is your way to influence the
|
||||
direction of kernel development. Users who complain from the sidelines
|
||||
are heard, but active developers have a stronger voice - and the ability
|
||||
to implement changes which make the kernel work better for their needs.
|
||||
|
||||
- When code is maintained separately, the possibility that a third party
|
||||
will contribute a different implementation of a similar feature always
|
||||
exists. Should that happen, getting your code merged will become much
|
||||
harder - to the point of impossibility. Then you will be faced with the
|
||||
unpleasant alternatives of either (1) maintaining a nonstandard feature
|
||||
out of tree indefinitely, or (2) abandoning your code and migrating your
|
||||
users over to the in-tree version.
|
||||
|
||||
- Contribution of code is the fundamental action which makes the whole
|
||||
process work. By contributing your code you can add new functionality to
|
||||
the kernel and provide capabilities and examples which are of use to
|
||||
other kernel developers. If you have developed code for Linux (or are
|
||||
thinking about doing so), you clearly have an interest in the continued
|
||||
success of this platform; contributing code is one of the best ways to
|
||||
help ensure that success.
|
||||
|
||||
All of the reasoning above applies to any out-of-tree kernel code,
|
||||
including code which is distributed in proprietary, binary-only form.
|
||||
There are, however, additional factors which should be taken into account
|
||||
before considering any sort of binary-only kernel code distribution. These
|
||||
include:
|
||||
|
||||
- The legal issues around the distribution of proprietary kernel modules
|
||||
are cloudy at best; quite a few kernel copyright holders believe that
|
||||
most binary-only modules are derived products of the kernel and that, as
|
||||
a result, their distribution is a violation of the GNU General Public
|
||||
license (about which more will be said below). Your author is not a
|
||||
lawyer, and nothing in this document can possibly be considered to be
|
||||
legal advice. The true legal status of closed-source modules can only be
|
||||
determined by the courts. But the uncertainty which haunts those modules
|
||||
is there regardless.
|
||||
|
||||
- Binary modules greatly increase the difficulty of debugging kernel
|
||||
problems, to the point that most kernel developers will not even try. So
|
||||
the distribution of binary-only modules will make it harder for your
|
||||
users to get support from the community.
|
||||
|
||||
- Support is also harder for distributors of binary-only modules, who must
|
||||
provide a version of the module for every distribution and every kernel
|
||||
version they wish to support. Dozens of builds of a single module can
|
||||
be required to provide reasonably comprehensive coverage, and your users
|
||||
will have to upgrade your module separately every time they upgrade their
|
||||
kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
- Everything that was said above about code review applies doubly to
|
||||
closed-source code. Since this code is not available at all, it cannot
|
||||
have been reviewed by the community and will, beyond doubt, have serious
|
||||
problems.
|
||||
|
||||
Makers of embedded systems, in particular, may be tempted to disregard much
|
||||
of what has been said in this section in the belief that they are shipping
|
||||
a self-contained product which uses a frozen kernel version and requires no
|
||||
more development after its release. This argument misses the value of
|
||||
widespread code review and the value of allowing your users to add
|
||||
capabilities to your product. But these products, too, have a limited
|
||||
commercial life, after which a new version must be released. At that
|
||||
point, vendors whose code is in the mainline and well maintained will be
|
||||
much better positioned to get the new product ready for market quickly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1.5: LICENSING
|
||||
|
||||
Code is contributed to the Linux kernel under a number of licenses, but all
|
||||
code must be compatible with version 2 of the GNU General Public License
|
||||
(GPLv2), which is the license covering the kernel distribution as a whole.
|
||||
In practice, that means that all code contributions are covered either by
|
||||
GPLv2 (with, optionally, language allowing distribution under later
|
||||
versions of the GPL) or the three-clause BSD license. Any contributions
|
||||
which are not covered by a compatible license will not be accepted into the
|
||||
kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright assignments are not required (or requested) for code contributed
|
||||
to the kernel. All code merged into the mainline kernel retains its
|
||||
original ownership; as a result, the kernel now has thousands of owners.
|
||||
|
||||
One implication of this ownership structure is that any attempt to change
|
||||
the licensing of the kernel is doomed to almost certain failure. There are
|
||||
few practical scenarios where the agreement of all copyright holders could
|
||||
be obtained (or their code removed from the kernel). So, in particular,
|
||||
there is no prospect of a migration to version 3 of the GPL in the
|
||||
foreseeable future.
|
||||
|
||||
It is imperative that all code contributed to the kernel be legitimately
|
||||
free software. For that reason, code from anonymous (or pseudonymous)
|
||||
contributors will not be accepted. All contributors are required to "sign
|
||||
off" on their code, stating that the code can be distributed with the
|
||||
kernel under the GPL. Code which has not been licensed as free software by
|
||||
its owner, or which risks creating copyright-related problems for the
|
||||
kernel (such as code which derives from reverse-engineering efforts lacking
|
||||
proper safeguards) cannot be contributed.
|
||||
|
||||
Questions about copyright-related issues are common on Linux development
|
||||
mailing lists. Such questions will normally receive no shortage of
|
||||
answers, but one should bear in mind that the people answering those
|
||||
questions are not lawyers and cannot provide legal advice. If you have
|
||||
legal questions relating to Linux source code, there is no substitute for
|
||||
talking with a lawyer who understands this field. Relying on answers
|
||||
obtained on technical mailing lists is a risky affair.
|
459
Documentation/development-process/2.Process
Normal file
459
Documentation/development-process/2.Process
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
|
||||
2: HOW THE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS WORKS
|
||||
|
||||
Linux kernel development in the early 1990's was a pretty loose affair,
|
||||
with relatively small numbers of users and developers involved. With a
|
||||
user base in the millions and with some 2,000 developers involved over the
|
||||
course of one year, the kernel has since had to evolve a number of
|
||||
processes to keep development happening smoothly. A solid understanding of
|
||||
how the process works is required in order to be an effective part of it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.1: THE BIG PICTURE
|
||||
|
||||
The kernel developers use a loosely time-based release process, with a new
|
||||
major kernel release happening every two or three months. The recent
|
||||
release history looks like this:
|
||||
|
||||
2.6.26 July 13, 2008
|
||||
2.6.25 April 16, 2008
|
||||
2.6.24 January 24, 2008
|
||||
2.6.23 October 9, 2007
|
||||
2.6.22 July 8, 2007
|
||||
2.6.21 April 25, 2007
|
||||
2.6.20 February 4, 2007
|
||||
|
||||
Every 2.6.x release is a major kernel release with new features, internal
|
||||
API changes, and more. A typical 2.6 release can contain over 10,000
|
||||
changesets with changes to several hundred thousand lines of code. 2.6 is
|
||||
thus the leading edge of Linux kernel development; the kernel uses a
|
||||
rolling development model which is continually integrating major changes.
|
||||
|
||||
A relatively straightforward discipline is followed with regard to the
|
||||
merging of patches for each release. At the beginning of each development
|
||||
cycle, the "merge window" is said to be open. At that time, code which is
|
||||
deemed to be sufficiently stable (and which is accepted by the development
|
||||
community) is merged into the mainline kernel. The bulk of changes for a
|
||||
new development cycle (and all of the major changes) will be merged during
|
||||
this time, at a rate approaching 1,000 changes ("patches," or "changesets")
|
||||
per day.
|
||||
|
||||
(As an aside, it is worth noting that the changes integrated during the
|
||||
merge window do not come out of thin air; they have been collected, tested,
|
||||
and staged ahead of time. How that process works will be described in
|
||||
detail later on).
|
||||
|
||||
The merge window lasts for two weeks. At the end of this time, Linus
|
||||
Torvalds will declare that the window is closed and release the first of
|
||||
the "rc" kernels. For the kernel which is destined to be 2.6.26, for
|
||||
example, the release which happens at the end of the merge window will be
|
||||
called 2.6.26-rc1. The -rc1 release is the signal that the time to merge
|
||||
new features has passed, and that the time to stabilize the next kernel has
|
||||
begun.
|
||||
|
||||
Over the next six to ten weeks, only patches which fix problems should be
|
||||
submitted to the mainline. On occasion a more significant change will be
|
||||
allowed, but such occasions are rare; developers who try to merge new
|
||||
features outside of the merge window tend to get an unfriendly reception.
|
||||
As a general rule, if you miss the merge window for a given feature, the
|
||||
best thing to do is to wait for the next development cycle. (An occasional
|
||||
exception is made for drivers for previously-unsupported hardware; if they
|
||||
touch no in-tree code, they cannot cause regressions and should be safe to
|
||||
add at any time).
|
||||
|
||||
As fixes make their way into the mainline, the patch rate will slow over
|
||||
time. Linus releases new -rc kernels about once a week; a normal series
|
||||
will get up to somewhere between -rc6 and -rc9 before the kernel is
|
||||
considered to be sufficiently stable and the final 2.6.x release is made.
|
||||
At that point the whole process starts over again.
|
||||
|
||||
As an example, here is how the 2.6.25 development cycle went (all dates in
|
||||
2008):
|
||||
|
||||
January 24 2.6.24 stable release
|
||||
February 10 2.6.25-rc1, merge window closes
|
||||
February 15 2.6.25-rc2
|
||||
February 24 2.6.25-rc3
|
||||
March 4 2.6.25-rc4
|
||||
March 9 2.6.25-rc5
|
||||
March 16 2.6.25-rc6
|
||||
March 25 2.6.25-rc7
|
||||
April 1 2.6.25-rc8
|
||||
April 11 2.6.25-rc9
|
||||
April 16 2.6.25 stable release
|
||||
|
||||
How do the developers decide when to close the development cycle and create
|
||||
the stable release? The most significant metric used is the list of
|
||||
regressions from previous releases. No bugs are welcome, but those which
|
||||
break systems which worked in the past are considered to be especially
|
||||
serious. For this reason, patches which cause regressions are looked upon
|
||||
unfavorably and are quite likely to be reverted during the stabilization
|
||||
period.
|
||||
|
||||
The developers' goal is to fix all known regressions before the stable
|
||||
release is made. In the real world, this kind of perfection is hard to
|
||||
achieve; there are just too many variables in a project of this size.
|
||||
There comes a point where delaying the final release just makes the problem
|
||||
worse; the pile of changes waiting for the next merge window will grow
|
||||
larger, creating even more regressions the next time around. So most 2.6.x
|
||||
kernels go out with a handful of known regressions though, hopefully, none
|
||||
of them are serious.
|
||||
|
||||
Once a stable release is made, its ongoing maintenance is passed off to the
|
||||
"stable team," currently comprised of Greg Kroah-Hartman and Chris Wright.
|
||||
The stable team will release occasional updates to the stable release using
|
||||
the 2.6.x.y numbering scheme. To be considered for an update release, a
|
||||
patch must (1) fix a significant bug, and (2) already be merged into the
|
||||
mainline for the next development kernel. Continuing our 2.6.25 example,
|
||||
the history (as of this writing) is:
|
||||
|
||||
May 1 2.6.25.1
|
||||
May 6 2.6.25.2
|
||||
May 9 2.6.25.3
|
||||
May 15 2.6.25.4
|
||||
June 7 2.6.25.5
|
||||
June 9 2.6.25.6
|
||||
June 16 2.6.25.7
|
||||
June 21 2.6.25.8
|
||||
June 24 2.6.25.9
|
||||
|
||||
Stable updates for a given kernel are made for approximately six months;
|
||||
after that, the maintenance of stable releases is solely the responsibility
|
||||
of the distributors which have shipped that particular kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.2: THE LIFECYCLE OF A PATCH
|
||||
|
||||
Patches do not go directly from the developer's keyboard into the mainline
|
||||
kernel. There is, instead, a somewhat involved (if somewhat informal)
|
||||
process designed to ensure that each patch is reviewed for quality and that
|
||||
each patch implements a change which is desirable to have in the mainline.
|
||||
This process can happen quickly for minor fixes, or, in the case of large
|
||||
and controversial changes, go on for years. Much developer frustration
|
||||
comes from a lack of understanding of this process or from attempts to
|
||||
circumvent it.
|
||||
|
||||
In the hopes of reducing that frustration, this document will describe how
|
||||
a patch gets into the kernel. What follows below is an introduction which
|
||||
describes the process in a somewhat idealized way. A much more detailed
|
||||
treatment will come in later sections.
|
||||
|
||||
The stages that a patch goes through are, generally:
|
||||
|
||||
- Design. This is where the real requirements for the patch - and the way
|
||||
those requirements will be met - are laid out. Design work is often
|
||||
done without involving the community, but it is better to do this work
|
||||
in the open if at all possible; it can save a lot of time redesigning
|
||||
things later.
|
||||
|
||||
- Early review. Patches are posted to the relevant mailing list, and
|
||||
developers on that list reply with any comments they may have. This
|
||||
process should turn up any major problems with a patch if all goes
|
||||
well.
|
||||
|
||||
- Wider review. When the patch is getting close to ready for mainline
|
||||
inclusion, it will be accepted by a relevant subsystem maintainer -
|
||||
though this acceptance is not a guarantee that the patch will make it
|
||||
all the way to the mainline. The patch will show up in the maintainer's
|
||||
subsystem tree and into the staging trees (described below). When the
|
||||
process works, this step leads to more extensive review of the patch and
|
||||
the discovery of any problems resulting from the integration of this
|
||||
patch with work being done by others.
|
||||
|
||||
- Merging into the mainline. Eventually, a successful patch will be
|
||||
merged into the mainline repository managed by Linus Torvalds. More
|
||||
comments and/or problems may surface at this time; it is important that
|
||||
the developer be responsive to these and fix any issues which arise.
|
||||
|
||||
- Stable release. The number of users potentially affected by the patch
|
||||
is now large, so, once again, new problems may arise.
|
||||
|
||||
- Long-term maintenance. While it is certainly possible for a developer
|
||||
to forget about code after merging it, that sort of behavior tends to
|
||||
leave a poor impression in the development community. Merging code
|
||||
eliminates some of the maintenance burden, in that others will fix
|
||||
problems caused by API changes. But the original developer should
|
||||
continue to take responsibility for the code if it is to remain useful
|
||||
in the longer term.
|
||||
|
||||
One of the largest mistakes made by kernel developers (or their employers)
|
||||
is to try to cut the process down to a single "merging into the mainline"
|
||||
step. This approach invariably leads to frustration for everybody
|
||||
involved.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.3: HOW PATCHES GET INTO THE KERNEL
|
||||
|
||||
There is exactly one person who can merge patches into the mainline kernel
|
||||
repository: Linus Torvalds. But, of the over 12,000 patches which went
|
||||
into the 2.6.25 kernel, only 250 (around 2%) were directly chosen by Linus
|
||||
himself. The kernel project has long since grown to a size where no single
|
||||
developer could possibly inspect and select every patch unassisted. The
|
||||
way the kernel developers have addressed this growth is through the use of
|
||||
a lieutenant system built around a chain of trust.
|
||||
|
||||
The kernel code base is logically broken down into a set of subsystems:
|
||||
networking, specific architecture support, memory management, video
|
||||
devices, etc. Most subsystems have a designated maintainer, a developer
|
||||
who has overall responsibility for the code within that subsystem. These
|
||||
subsystem maintainers are the gatekeepers (in a loose way) for the portion
|
||||
of the kernel they manage; they are the ones who will (usually) accept a
|
||||
patch for inclusion into the mainline kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
Subsystem maintainers each manage their own version of the kernel source
|
||||
tree, usually (but certainly not always) using the git source management
|
||||
tool. Tools like git (and related tools like quilt or mercurial) allow
|
||||
maintainers to track a list of patches, including authorship information
|
||||
and other metadata. At any given time, the maintainer can identify which
|
||||
patches in his or her repository are not found in the mainline.
|
||||
|
||||
When the merge window opens, top-level maintainers will ask Linus to "pull"
|
||||
the patches they have selected for merging from their repositories. If
|
||||
Linus agrees, the stream of patches will flow up into his repository,
|
||||
becoming part of the mainline kernel. The amount of attention that Linus
|
||||
pays to specific patches received in a pull operation varies. It is clear
|
||||
that, sometimes, he looks quite closely. But, as a general rule, Linus
|
||||
trusts the subsystem maintainers to not send bad patches upstream.
|
||||
|
||||
Subsystem maintainers, in turn, can pull patches from other maintainers.
|
||||
For example, the networking tree is built from patches which accumulated
|
||||
first in trees dedicated to network device drivers, wireless networking,
|
||||
etc. This chain of repositories can be arbitrarily long, though it rarely
|
||||
exceeds two or three links. Since each maintainer in the chain trusts
|
||||
those managing lower-level trees, this process is known as the "chain of
|
||||
trust."
|
||||
|
||||
Clearly, in a system like this, getting patches into the kernel depends on
|
||||
finding the right maintainer. Sending patches directly to Linus is not
|
||||
normally the right way to go.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.4: STAGING TREES
|
||||
|
||||
The chain of subsystem trees guides the flow of patches into the kernel,
|
||||
but it also raises an interesting question: what if somebody wants to look
|
||||
at all of the patches which are being prepared for the next merge window?
|
||||
Developers will be interested in what other changes are pending to see
|
||||
whether there are any conflicts to worry about; a patch which changes a
|
||||
core kernel function prototype, for example, will conflict with any other
|
||||
patches which use the older form of that function. Reviewers and testers
|
||||
want access to the changes in their integrated form before all of those
|
||||
changes land in the mainline kernel. One could pull changes from all of
|
||||
the interesting subsystem trees, but that would be a big and error-prone
|
||||
job.
|
||||
|
||||
The answer comes in the form of staging trees, where subsystem trees are
|
||||
collected for testing and review. The older of these trees, maintained by
|
||||
Andrew Morton, is called "-mm" (for memory management, which is how it got
|
||||
started). The -mm tree integrates patches from a long list of subsystem
|
||||
trees; it also has some patches aimed at helping with debugging.
|
||||
|
||||
Beyond that, -mm contains a significant collection of patches which have
|
||||
been selected by Andrew directly. These patches may have been posted on a
|
||||
mailing list, or they may apply to a part of the kernel for which there is
|
||||
no designated subsystem tree. As a result, -mm operates as a sort of
|
||||
subsystem tree of last resort; if there is no other obvious path for a
|
||||
patch into the mainline, it is likely to end up in -mm. Miscellaneous
|
||||
patches which accumulate in -mm will eventually either be forwarded on to
|
||||
an appropriate subsystem tree or be sent directly to Linus. In a typical
|
||||
development cycle, approximately 10% of the patches going into the mainline
|
||||
get there via -mm.
|
||||
|
||||
The current -mm patch can always be found from the front page of
|
||||
|
||||
http://kernel.org/
|
||||
|
||||
Those who want to see the current state of -mm can get the "-mm of the
|
||||
moment" tree, found at:
|
||||
|
||||
http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/mmotm/
|
||||
|
||||
Use of the MMOTM tree is likely to be a frustrating experience, though;
|
||||
there is a definite chance that it will not even compile.
|
||||
|
||||
The other staging tree, started more recently, is linux-next, maintained by
|
||||
Stephen Rothwell. The linux-next tree is, by design, a snapshot of what
|
||||
the mainline is expected to look like after the next merge window closes.
|
||||
Linux-next trees are announced on the linux-kernel and linux-next mailing
|
||||
lists when they are assembled; they can be downloaded from:
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sfr/linux-next/
|
||||
|
||||
Some information about linux-next has been gathered at:
|
||||
|
||||
http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/
|
||||
|
||||
How the linux-next tree will fit into the development process is still
|
||||
changing. As of this writing, the first full development cycle involving
|
||||
linux-next (2.6.26) is coming to an end; thus far, it has proved to be a
|
||||
valuable resource for finding and fixing integration problems before the
|
||||
beginning of the merge window. See http://lwn.net/Articles/287155/ for
|
||||
more information on how linux-next has worked to set up the 2.6.27 merge
|
||||
window.
|
||||
|
||||
Some developers have begun to suggest that linux-next should be used as the
|
||||
target for future development as well. The linux-next tree does tend to be
|
||||
far ahead of the mainline and is more representative of the tree into which
|
||||
any new work will be merged. The downside to this idea is that the
|
||||
volatility of linux-next tends to make it a difficult development target.
|
||||
See http://lwn.net/Articles/289013/ for more information on this topic, and
|
||||
stay tuned; much is still in flux where linux-next is involved.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.5: TOOLS
|
||||
|
||||
As can be seen from the above text, the kernel development process depends
|
||||
heavily on the ability to herd collections of patches in various
|
||||
directions. The whole thing would not work anywhere near as well as it
|
||||
does without suitably powerful tools. Tutorials on how to use these tools
|
||||
are well beyond the scope of this document, but there is space for a few
|
||||
pointers.
|
||||
|
||||
By far the dominant source code management system used by the kernel
|
||||
community is git. Git is one of a number of distributed version control
|
||||
systems being developed in the free software community. It is well tuned
|
||||
for kernel development, in that it performs quite well when dealing with
|
||||
large repositories and large numbers of patches. It also has a reputation
|
||||
for being difficult to learn and use, though it has gotten better over
|
||||
time. Some sort of familiarity with git is almost a requirement for kernel
|
||||
developers; even if they do not use it for their own work, they'll need git
|
||||
to keep up with what other developers (and the mainline) are doing.
|
||||
|
||||
Git is now packaged by almost all Linux distributions. There is a home
|
||||
page at
|
||||
|
||||
http://git.or.cz/
|
||||
|
||||
That page has pointers to documentation and tutorials. One should be
|
||||
aware, in particular, of the Kernel Hacker's Guide to git, which has
|
||||
information specific to kernel development:
|
||||
|
||||
http://linux.yyz.us/git-howto.html
|
||||
|
||||
Among the kernel developers who do not use git, the most popular choice is
|
||||
almost certainly Mercurial:
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.selenic.com/mercurial/
|
||||
|
||||
Mercurial shares many features with git, but it provides an interface which
|
||||
many find easier to use.
|
||||
|
||||
The other tool worth knowing about is Quilt:
|
||||
|
||||
http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt/
|
||||
|
||||
Quilt is a patch management system, rather than a source code management
|
||||
system. It does not track history over time; it is, instead, oriented
|
||||
toward tracking a specific set of changes against an evolving code base.
|
||||
Some major subsystem maintainers use quilt to manage patches intended to go
|
||||
upstream. For the management of certain kinds of trees (-mm, for example),
|
||||
quilt is the best tool for the job.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.6: MAILING LISTS
|
||||
|
||||
A great deal of Linux kernel development work is done by way of mailing
|
||||
lists. It is hard to be a fully-functioning member of the community
|
||||
without joining at least one list somewhere. But Linux mailing lists also
|
||||
represent a potential hazard to developers, who risk getting buried under a
|
||||
load of electronic mail, running afoul of the conventions used on the Linux
|
||||
lists, or both.
|
||||
|
||||
Most kernel mailing lists are run on vger.kernel.org; the master list can
|
||||
be found at:
|
||||
|
||||
http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html
|
||||
|
||||
There are lists hosted elsewhere, though; a number of them are at
|
||||
lists.redhat.com.
|
||||
|
||||
The core mailing list for kernel development is, of course, linux-kernel.
|
||||
This list is an intimidating place to be; volume can reach 500 messages per
|
||||
day, the amount of noise is high, the conversation can be severely
|
||||
technical, and participants are not always concerned with showing a high
|
||||
degree of politeness. But there is no other place where the kernel
|
||||
development community comes together as a whole; developers who avoid this
|
||||
list will miss important information.
|
||||
|
||||
There are a few hints which can help with linux-kernel survival:
|
||||
|
||||
- Have the list delivered to a separate folder, rather than your main
|
||||
mailbox. One must be able to ignore the stream for sustained periods of
|
||||
time.
|
||||
|
||||
- Do not try to follow every conversation - nobody else does. It is
|
||||
important to filter on both the topic of interest (though note that
|
||||
long-running conversations can drift away from the original subject
|
||||
without changing the email subject line) and the people who are
|
||||
participating.
|
||||
|
||||
- Do not feed the trolls. If somebody is trying to stir up an angry
|
||||
response, ignore them.
|
||||
|
||||
- When responding to linux-kernel email (or that on other lists) preserve
|
||||
the Cc: header for all involved. In the absence of a strong reason (such
|
||||
as an explicit request), you should never remove recipients. Always make
|
||||
sure that the person you are responding to is in the Cc: list. This
|
||||
convention also makes it unnecessary to explicitly ask to be copied on
|
||||
replies to your postings.
|
||||
|
||||
- Search the list archives (and the net as a whole) before asking
|
||||
questions. Some developers can get impatient with people who clearly
|
||||
have not done their homework.
|
||||
|
||||
- Avoid top-posting (the practice of putting your answer above the quoted
|
||||
text you are responding to). It makes your response harder to read and
|
||||
makes a poor impression.
|
||||
|
||||
- Ask on the correct mailing list. Linux-kernel may be the general meeting
|
||||
point, but it is not the best place to find developers from all
|
||||
subsystems.
|
||||
|
||||
The last point - finding the correct mailing list - is a common place for
|
||||
beginning developers to go wrong. Somebody who asks a networking-related
|
||||
question on linux-kernel will almost certainly receive a polite suggestion
|
||||
to ask on the netdev list instead, as that is the list frequented by most
|
||||
networking developers. Other lists exist for the SCSI, video4linux, IDE,
|
||||
filesystem, etc. subsystems. The best place to look for mailing lists is
|
||||
in the MAINTAINERS file packaged with the kernel source.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.7: GETTING STARTED WITH KERNEL DEVELOPMENT
|
||||
|
||||
Questions about how to get started with the kernel development process are
|
||||
common - from both individuals and companies. Equally common are missteps
|
||||
which make the beginning of the relationship harder than it has to be.
|
||||
|
||||
Companies often look to hire well-known developers to get a development
|
||||
group started. This can, in fact, be an effective technique. But it also
|
||||
tends to be expensive and does not do much to grow the pool of experienced
|
||||
kernel developers. It is possible to bring in-house developers up to speed
|
||||
on Linux kernel development, given the investment of a bit of time. Taking
|
||||
this time can endow an employer with a group of developers who understand
|
||||
the kernel and the company both, and who can help to train others as well.
|
||||
Over the medium term, this is often the more profitable approach.
|
||||
|
||||
Individual developers are often, understandably, at a loss for a place to
|
||||
start. Beginning with a large project can be intimidating; one often wants
|
||||
to test the waters with something smaller first. This is the point where
|
||||
some developers jump into the creation of patches fixing spelling errors or
|
||||
minor coding style issues. Unfortunately, such patches create a level of
|
||||
noise which is distracting for the development community as a whole, so,
|
||||
increasingly, they are looked down upon. New developers wishing to
|
||||
introduce themselves to the community will not get the sort of reception
|
||||
they wish for by these means.
|
||||
|
||||
Andrew Morton gives this advice for aspiring kernel developers
|
||||
|
||||
The #1 project for all kernel beginners should surely be "make sure
|
||||
that the kernel runs perfectly at all times on all machines which
|
||||
you can lay your hands on". Usually the way to do this is to work
|
||||
with others on getting things fixed up (this can require
|
||||
persistence!) but that's fine - it's a part of kernel development.
|
||||
|
||||
(http://lwn.net/Articles/283982/).
|
||||
|
||||
In the absence of obvious problems to fix, developers are advised to look
|
||||
at the current lists of regressions and open bugs in general. There is
|
||||
never any shortage of issues in need of fixing; by addressing these issues,
|
||||
developers will gain experience with the process while, at the same time,
|
||||
building respect with the rest of the development community.
|
195
Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage
Normal file
195
Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
|
||||
3: EARLY-STAGE PLANNING
|
||||
|
||||
When contemplating a Linux kernel development project, it can be tempting
|
||||
to jump right in and start coding. As with any significant project,
|
||||
though, much of the groundwork for success is best laid before the first
|
||||
line of code is written. Some time spent in early planning and
|
||||
communication can save far more time later on.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3.1: SPECIFYING THE PROBLEM
|
||||
|
||||
Like any engineering project, a successful kernel enhancement starts with a
|
||||
clear description of the problem to be solved. In some cases, this step is
|
||||
easy: when a driver is needed for a specific piece of hardware, for
|
||||
example. In others, though, it is tempting to confuse the real problem
|
||||
with the proposed solution, and that can lead to difficulties.
|
||||
|
||||
Consider an example: some years ago, developers working with Linux audio
|
||||
sought a way to run applications without dropouts or other artifacts caused
|
||||
by excessive latency in the system. The solution they arrived at was a
|
||||
kernel module intended to hook into the Linux Security Module (LSM)
|
||||
framework; this module could be configured to give specific applications
|
||||
access to the realtime scheduler. This module was implemented and sent to
|
||||
the linux-kernel mailing list, where it immediately ran into problems.
|
||||
|
||||
To the audio developers, this security module was sufficient to solve their
|
||||
immediate problem. To the wider kernel community, though, it was seen as a
|
||||
misuse of the LSM framework (which is not intended to confer privileges
|
||||
onto processes which they would not otherwise have) and a risk to system
|
||||
stability. Their preferred solutions involved realtime scheduling access
|
||||
via the rlimit mechanism for the short term, and ongoing latency reduction
|
||||
work in the long term.
|
||||
|
||||
The audio community, however, could not see past the particular solution
|
||||
they had implemented; they were unwilling to accept alternatives. The
|
||||
resulting disagreement left those developers feeling disillusioned with the
|
||||
entire kernel development process; one of them went back to an audio list
|
||||
and posted this:
|
||||
|
||||
There are a number of very good Linux kernel developers, but they
|
||||
tend to get outshouted by a large crowd of arrogant fools. Trying
|
||||
to communicate user requirements to these people is a waste of
|
||||
time. They are much too "intelligent" to listen to lesser mortals.
|
||||
|
||||
(http://lwn.net/Articles/131776/).
|
||||
|
||||
The reality of the situation was different; the kernel developers were far
|
||||
more concerned about system stability, long-term maintenance, and finding
|
||||
the right solution to the problem than they were with a specific module.
|
||||
The moral of the story is to focus on the problem - not a specific solution
|
||||
- and to discuss it with the development community before investing in the
|
||||
creation of a body of code.
|
||||
|
||||
So, when contemplating a kernel development project, one should obtain
|
||||
answers to a short set of questions:
|
||||
|
||||
- What, exactly, is the problem which needs to be solved?
|
||||
|
||||
- Who are the users affected by this problem? Which use cases should the
|
||||
solution address?
|
||||
|
||||
- How does the kernel fall short in addressing that problem now?
|
||||
|
||||
Only then does it make sense to start considering possible solutions.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3.2: EARLY DISCUSSION
|
||||
|
||||
When planning a kernel development project, it makes great sense to hold
|
||||
discussions with the community before launching into implementation. Early
|
||||
communication can save time and trouble in a number of ways:
|
||||
|
||||
- It may well be that the problem is addressed by the kernel in ways which
|
||||
you have not understood. The Linux kernel is large and has a number of
|
||||
features and capabilities which are not immediately obvious. Not all
|
||||
kernel capabilities are documented as well as one might like, and it is
|
||||
easy to miss things. Your author has seen the posting of a complete
|
||||
driver which duplicated an existing driver that the new author had been
|
||||
unaware of. Code which reinvents existing wheels is not only wasteful;
|
||||
it will also not be accepted into the mainline kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
- There may be elements of the proposed solution which will not be
|
||||
acceptable for mainline merging. It is better to find out about
|
||||
problems like this before writing the code.
|
||||
|
||||
- It's entirely possible that other developers have thought about the
|
||||
problem; they may have ideas for a better solution, and may be willing
|
||||
to help in the creation of that solution.
|
||||
|
||||
Years of experience with the kernel development community have taught a
|
||||
clear lesson: kernel code which is designed and developed behind closed
|
||||
doors invariably has problems which are only revealed when the code is
|
||||
released into the community. Sometimes these problems are severe,
|
||||
requiring months or years of effort before the code can be brought up to
|
||||
the kernel community's standards. Some examples include:
|
||||
|
||||
- The Devicescape network stack was designed and implemented for
|
||||
single-processor systems. It could not be merged into the mainline
|
||||
until it was made suitable for multiprocessor systems. Retrofitting
|
||||
locking and such into code is a difficult task; as a result, the merging
|
||||
of this code (now called mac80211) was delayed for over a year.
|
||||
|
||||
- The Reiser4 filesystem included a number of capabilities which, in the
|
||||
core kernel developers' opinion, should have been implemented in the
|
||||
virtual filesystem layer instead. It also included features which could
|
||||
not easily be implemented without exposing the system to user-caused
|
||||
deadlocks. The late revelation of these problems - and refusal to
|
||||
address some of them - has caused Reiser4 to stay out of the mainline
|
||||
kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
- The AppArmor security module made use of internal virtual filesystem
|
||||
data structures in ways which were considered to be unsafe and
|
||||
unreliable. This code has since been significantly reworked, but
|
||||
remains outside of the mainline.
|
||||
|
||||
In each of these cases, a great deal of pain and extra work could have been
|
||||
avoided with some early discussion with the kernel developers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3.3: WHO DO YOU TALK TO?
|
||||
|
||||
When developers decide to take their plans public, the next question will
|
||||
be: where do we start? The answer is to find the right mailing list(s) and
|
||||
the right maintainer. For mailing lists, the best approach is to look in
|
||||
the MAINTAINERS file for a relevant place to post. If there is a suitable
|
||||
subsystem list, posting there is often preferable to posting on
|
||||
linux-kernel; you are more likely to reach developers with expertise in the
|
||||
relevant subsystem and the environment may be more supportive.
|
||||
|
||||
Finding maintainers can be a bit harder. Again, the MAINTAINERS file is
|
||||
the place to start. That file tends to not always be up to date, though,
|
||||
and not all subsystems are represented there. The person listed in the
|
||||
MAINTAINERS file may, in fact, not be the person who is actually acting in
|
||||
that role currently. So, when there is doubt about who to contact, a
|
||||
useful trick is to use git (and "git log" in particular) to see who is
|
||||
currently active within the subsystem of interest. Look at who is writing
|
||||
patches, and who, if anybody, is attaching Signed-off-by lines to those
|
||||
patches. Those are the people who will be best placed to help with a new
|
||||
development project.
|
||||
|
||||
If all else fails, talking to Andrew Morton can be an effective way to
|
||||
track down a maintainer for a specific piece of code.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3.4: WHEN TO POST?
|
||||
|
||||
If possible, posting your plans during the early stages can only be
|
||||
helpful. Describe the problem being solved and any plans that have been
|
||||
made on how the implementation will be done. Any information you can
|
||||
provide can help the development community provide useful input on the
|
||||
project.
|
||||
|
||||
One discouraging thing which can happen at this stage is not a hostile
|
||||
reaction, but, instead, little or no reaction at all. The sad truth of the
|
||||
matter is (1) kernel developers tend to be busy, (2) there is no shortage
|
||||
of people with grand plans and little code (or even prospect of code) to
|
||||
back them up, and (3) nobody is obligated to review or comment on ideas
|
||||
posted by others. If a request-for-comments posting yields little in the
|
||||
way of comments, do not assume that it means there is no interest in the
|
||||
project. Unfortunately, you also cannot assume that there are no problems
|
||||
with your idea. The best thing to do in this situation is to proceed,
|
||||
keeping the community informed as you go.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3.5: GETTING OFFICIAL BUY-IN
|
||||
|
||||
If your work is being done in a corporate environment - as most Linux
|
||||
kernel work is - you must, obviously, have permission from suitably
|
||||
empowered managers before you can post your company's plans or code to a
|
||||
public mailing list. The posting of code which has not been cleared for
|
||||
release under a GPL-compatible license can be especially problematic; the
|
||||
sooner that a company's management and legal staff can agree on the posting
|
||||
of a kernel development project, the better off everybody involved will be.
|
||||
|
||||
Some readers may be thinking at this point that their kernel work is
|
||||
intended to support a product which does not yet have an officially
|
||||
acknowledged existence. Revealing their employer's plans on a public
|
||||
mailing list may not be a viable option. In cases like this, it is worth
|
||||
considering whether the secrecy is really necessary; there is often no real
|
||||
need to keep development plans behind closed doors.
|
||||
|
||||
That said, there are also cases where a company legitimately cannot
|
||||
disclose its plans early in the development process. Companies with
|
||||
experienced kernel developers may choose to proceed in an open-loop manner
|
||||
on the assumption that they will be able to avoid serious integration
|
||||
problems later. For companies without that sort of in-house expertise, the
|
||||
best option is often to hire an outside developer to review the plans under
|
||||
a non-disclosure agreement. The Linux Foundation operates an NDA program
|
||||
designed to help with this sort of situation; more information can be found
|
||||
at:
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/NDA_program
|
||||
|
||||
This kind of review is often enough to avoid serious problems later on
|
||||
without requiring public disclosure of the project.
|
384
Documentation/development-process/4.Coding
Normal file
384
Documentation/development-process/4.Coding
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,384 @@
|
||||
4: GETTING THE CODE RIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
While there is much to be said for a solid and community-oriented design
|
||||
process, the proof of any kernel development project is in the resulting
|
||||
code. It is the code which will be examined by other developers and merged
|
||||
(or not) into the mainline tree. So it is the quality of this code which
|
||||
will determine the ultimate success of the project.
|
||||
|
||||
This section will examine the coding process. We'll start with a look at a
|
||||
number of ways in which kernel developers can go wrong. Then the focus
|
||||
will shift toward doing things right and the tools which can help in that
|
||||
quest.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4.1: PITFALLS
|
||||
|
||||
* Coding style
|
||||
|
||||
The kernel has long had a standard coding style, described in
|
||||
Documentation/CodingStyle. For much of that time, the policies described
|
||||
in that file were taken as being, at most, advisory. As a result, there is
|
||||
a substantial amount of code in the kernel which does not meet the coding
|
||||
style guidelines. The presence of that code leads to two independent
|
||||
hazards for kernel developers.
|
||||
|
||||
The first of these is to believe that the kernel coding standards do not
|
||||
matter and are not enforced. The truth of the matter is that adding new
|
||||
code to the kernel is very difficult if that code is not coded according to
|
||||
the standard; many developers will request that the code be reformatted
|
||||
before they will even review it. A code base as large as the kernel
|
||||
requires some uniformity of code to make it possible for developers to
|
||||
quickly understand any part of it. So there is no longer room for
|
||||
strangely-formatted code.
|
||||
|
||||
Occasionally, the kernel's coding style will run into conflict with an
|
||||
employer's mandated style. In such cases, the kernel's style will have to
|
||||
win before the code can be merged. Putting code into the kernel means
|
||||
giving up a degree of control in a number of ways - including control over
|
||||
how the code is formatted.
|
||||
|
||||
The other trap is to assume that code which is already in the kernel is
|
||||
urgently in need of coding style fixes. Developers may start to generate
|
||||
reformatting patches as a way of gaining familiarity with the process, or
|
||||
as a way of getting their name into the kernel changelogs - or both. But
|
||||
pure coding style fixes are seen as noise by the development community;
|
||||
they tend to get a chilly reception. So this type of patch is best
|
||||
avoided. It is natural to fix the style of a piece of code while working
|
||||
on it for other reasons, but coding style changes should not be made for
|
||||
their own sake.
|
||||
|
||||
The coding style document also should not be read as an absolute law which
|
||||
can never be transgressed. If there is a good reason to go against the
|
||||
style (a line which becomes far less readable if split to fit within the
|
||||
80-column limit, for example), just do it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
* Abstraction layers
|
||||
|
||||
Computer Science professors teach students to make extensive use of
|
||||
abstraction layers in the name of flexibility and information hiding.
|
||||
Certainly the kernel makes extensive use of abstraction; no project
|
||||
involving several million lines of code could do otherwise and survive.
|
||||
But experience has shown that excessive or premature abstraction can be
|
||||
just as harmful as premature optimization. Abstraction should be used to
|
||||
the level required and no further.
|
||||
|
||||
At a simple level, consider a function which has an argument which is
|
||||
always passed as zero by all callers. One could retain that argument just
|
||||
in case somebody eventually needs to use the extra flexibility that it
|
||||
provides. By that time, though, chances are good that the code which
|
||||
implements this extra argument has been broken in some subtle way which was
|
||||
never noticed - because it has never been used. Or, when the need for
|
||||
extra flexibility arises, it does not do so in a way which matches the
|
||||
programmer's early expectation. Kernel developers will routinely submit
|
||||
patches to remove unused arguments; they should, in general, not be added
|
||||
in the first place.
|
||||
|
||||
Abstraction layers which hide access to hardware - often to allow the bulk
|
||||
of a driver to be used with multiple operating systems - are especially
|
||||
frowned upon. Such layers obscure the code and may impose a performance
|
||||
penalty; they do not belong in the Linux kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
On the other hand, if you find yourself copying significant amounts of code
|
||||
from another kernel subsystem, it is time to ask whether it would, in fact,
|
||||
make sense to pull out some of that code into a separate library or to
|
||||
implement that functionality at a higher level. There is no value in
|
||||
replicating the same code throughout the kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
* #ifdef and preprocessor use in general
|
||||
|
||||
The C preprocessor seems to present a powerful temptation to some C
|
||||
programmers, who see it as a way to efficiently encode a great deal of
|
||||
flexibility into a source file. But the preprocessor is not C, and heavy
|
||||
use of it results in code which is much harder for others to read and
|
||||
harder for the compiler to check for correctness. Heavy preprocessor use
|
||||
is almost always a sign of code which needs some cleanup work.
|
||||
|
||||
Conditional compilation with #ifdef is, indeed, a powerful feature, and it
|
||||
is used within the kernel. But there is little desire to see code which is
|
||||
sprinkled liberally with #ifdef blocks. As a general rule, #ifdef use
|
||||
should be confined to header files whenever possible.
|
||||
Conditionally-compiled code can be confined to functions which, if the code
|
||||
is not to be present, simply become empty. The compiler will then quietly
|
||||
optimize out the call to the empty function. The result is far cleaner
|
||||
code which is easier to follow.
|
||||
|
||||
C preprocessor macros present a number of hazards, including possible
|
||||
multiple evaluation of expressions with side effects and no type safety.
|
||||
If you are tempted to define a macro, consider creating an inline function
|
||||
instead. The code which results will be the same, but inline functions are
|
||||
easier to read, do not evaluate their arguments multiple times, and allow
|
||||
the compiler to perform type checking on the arguments and return value.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
* Inline functions
|
||||
|
||||
Inline functions present a hazard of their own, though. Programmers can
|
||||
become enamored of the perceived efficiency inherent in avoiding a function
|
||||
call and fill a source file with inline functions. Those functions,
|
||||
however, can actually reduce performance. Since their code is replicated
|
||||
at each call site, they end up bloating the size of the compiled kernel.
|
||||
That, in turn, creates pressure on the processor's memory caches, which can
|
||||
slow execution dramatically. Inline functions, as a rule, should be quite
|
||||
small and relatively rare. The cost of a function call, after all, is not
|
||||
that high; the creation of large numbers of inline functions is a classic
|
||||
example of premature optimization.
|
||||
|
||||
In general, kernel programmers ignore cache effects at their peril. The
|
||||
classic time/space tradeoff taught in beginning data structures classes
|
||||
often does not apply to contemporary hardware. Space *is* time, in that a
|
||||
larger program will run slower than one which is more compact.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
* Locking
|
||||
|
||||
In May, 2006, the "Devicescape" networking stack was, with great
|
||||
fanfare, released under the GPL and made available for inclusion in the
|
||||
mainline kernel. This donation was welcome news; support for wireless
|
||||
networking in Linux was considered substandard at best, and the Devicescape
|
||||
stack offered the promise of fixing that situation. Yet, this code did not
|
||||
actually make it into the mainline until June, 2007 (2.6.22). What
|
||||
happened?
|
||||
|
||||
This code showed a number of signs of having been developed behind
|
||||
corporate doors. But one large problem in particular was that it was not
|
||||
designed to work on multiprocessor systems. Before this networking stack
|
||||
(now called mac80211) could be merged, a locking scheme needed to be
|
||||
retrofitted onto it.
|
||||
|
||||
Once upon a time, Linux kernel code could be developed without thinking
|
||||
about the concurrency issues presented by multiprocessor systems. Now,
|
||||
however, this document is being written on a dual-core laptop. Even on
|
||||
single-processor systems, work being done to improve responsiveness will
|
||||
raise the level of concurrency within the kernel. The days when kernel
|
||||
code could be written without thinking about locking are long past.
|
||||
|
||||
Any resource (data structures, hardware registers, etc.) which could be
|
||||
accessed concurrently by more than one thread must be protected by a lock.
|
||||
New code should be written with this requirement in mind; retrofitting
|
||||
locking after the fact is a rather more difficult task. Kernel developers
|
||||
should take the time to understand the available locking primitives well
|
||||
enough to pick the right tool for the job. Code which shows a lack of
|
||||
attention to concurrency will have a difficult path into the mainline.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
* Regressions
|
||||
|
||||
One final hazard worth mentioning is this: it can be tempting to make a
|
||||
change (which may bring big improvements) which causes something to break
|
||||
for existing users. This kind of change is called a "regression," and
|
||||
regressions have become most unwelcome in the mainline kernel. With few
|
||||
exceptions, changes which cause regressions will be backed out if the
|
||||
regression cannot be fixed in a timely manner. Far better to avoid the
|
||||
regression in the first place.
|
||||
|
||||
It is often argued that a regression can be justified if it causes things
|
||||
to work for more people than it creates problems for. Why not make a
|
||||
change if it brings new functionality to ten systems for each one it
|
||||
breaks? The best answer to this question was expressed by Linus in July,
|
||||
2007:
|
||||
|
||||
So we don't fix bugs by introducing new problems. That way lies
|
||||
madness, and nobody ever knows if you actually make any real
|
||||
progress at all. Is it two steps forwards, one step back, or one
|
||||
step forward and two steps back?
|
||||
|
||||
(http://lwn.net/Articles/243460/).
|
||||
|
||||
An especially unwelcome type of regression is any sort of change to the
|
||||
user-space ABI. Once an interface has been exported to user space, it must
|
||||
be supported indefinitely. This fact makes the creation of user-space
|
||||
interfaces particularly challenging: since they cannot be changed in
|
||||
incompatible ways, they must be done right the first time. For this
|
||||
reason, a great deal of thought, clear documentation, and wide review for
|
||||
user-space interfaces is always required.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4.2: CODE CHECKING TOOLS
|
||||
|
||||
For now, at least, the writing of error-free code remains an ideal that few
|
||||
of us can reach. What we can hope to do, though, is to catch and fix as
|
||||
many of those errors as possible before our code goes into the mainline
|
||||
kernel. To that end, the kernel developers have put together an impressive
|
||||
array of tools which can catch a wide variety of obscure problems in an
|
||||
automated way. Any problem caught by the computer is a problem which will
|
||||
not afflict a user later on, so it stands to reason that the automated
|
||||
tools should be used whenever possible.
|
||||
|
||||
The first step is simply to heed the warnings produced by the compiler.
|
||||
Contemporary versions of gcc can detect (and warn about) a large number of
|
||||
potential errors. Quite often, these warnings point to real problems.
|
||||
Code submitted for review should, as a rule, not produce any compiler
|
||||
warnings. When silencing warnings, take care to understand the real cause
|
||||
and try to avoid "fixes" which make the warning go away without addressing
|
||||
its cause.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that not all compiler warnings are enabled by default. Build the
|
||||
kernel with "make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W" to get the full set.
|
||||
|
||||
The kernel provides several configuration options which turn on debugging
|
||||
features; most of these are found in the "kernel hacking" submenu. Several
|
||||
of these options should be turned on for any kernel used for development or
|
||||
testing purposes. In particular, you should turn on:
|
||||
|
||||
- ENABLE_WARN_DEPRECATED, ENABLE_MUST_CHECK, and FRAME_WARN to get an
|
||||
extra set of warnings for problems like the use of deprecated interfaces
|
||||
or ignoring an important return value from a function. The output
|
||||
generated by these warnings can be verbose, but one need not worry about
|
||||
warnings from other parts of the kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
- DEBUG_OBJECTS will add code to track the lifetime of various objects
|
||||
created by the kernel and warn when things are done out of order. If
|
||||
you are adding a subsystem which creates (and exports) complex objects
|
||||
of its own, consider adding support for the object debugging
|
||||
infrastructure.
|
||||
|
||||
- DEBUG_SLAB can find a variety of memory allocation and use errors; it
|
||||
should be used on most development kernels.
|
||||
|
||||
- DEBUG_SPINLOCK, DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP, and DEBUG_MUTEXES will find a
|
||||
number of common locking errors.
|
||||
|
||||
There are quite a few other debugging options, some of which will be
|
||||
discussed below. Some of them have a significant performance impact and
|
||||
should not be used all of the time. But some time spent learning the
|
||||
available options will likely be paid back many times over in short order.
|
||||
|
||||
One of the heavier debugging tools is the locking checker, or "lockdep."
|
||||
This tool will track the acquisition and release of every lock (spinlock or
|
||||
mutex) in the system, the order in which locks are acquired relative to
|
||||
each other, the current interrupt environment, and more. It can then
|
||||
ensure that locks are always acquired in the same order, that the same
|
||||
interrupt assumptions apply in all situations, and so on. In other words,
|
||||
lockdep can find a number of scenarios in which the system could, on rare
|
||||
occasion, deadlock. This kind of problem can be painful (for both
|
||||
developers and users) in a deployed system; lockdep allows them to be found
|
||||
in an automated manner ahead of time. Code with any sort of non-trivial
|
||||
locking should be run with lockdep enabled before being submitted for
|
||||
inclusion.
|
||||
|
||||
As a diligent kernel programmer, you will, beyond doubt, check the return
|
||||
status of any operation (such as a memory allocation) which can fail. The
|
||||
fact of the matter, though, is that the resulting failure recovery paths
|
||||
are, probably, completely untested. Untested code tends to be broken code;
|
||||
you could be much more confident of your code if all those error-handling
|
||||
paths had been exercised a few times.
|
||||
|
||||
The kernel provides a fault injection framework which can do exactly that,
|
||||
especially where memory allocations are involved. With fault injection
|
||||
enabled, a configurable percentage of memory allocations will be made to
|
||||
fail; these failures can be restricted to a specific range of code.
|
||||
Running with fault injection enabled allows the programmer to see how the
|
||||
code responds when things go badly. See
|
||||
Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.text for more information on
|
||||
how to use this facility.
|
||||
|
||||
Other kinds of errors can be found with the "sparse" static analysis tool.
|
||||
With sparse, the programmer can be warned about confusion between
|
||||
user-space and kernel-space addresses, mixture of big-endian and
|
||||
small-endian quantities, the passing of integer values where a set of bit
|
||||
flags is expected, and so on. Sparse must be installed separately (it can
|
||||
be found at http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/devel/sparse/ if your
|
||||
distributor does not package it); it can then be run on the code by adding
|
||||
"C=1" to your make command.
|
||||
|
||||
Other kinds of portability errors are best found by compiling your code for
|
||||
other architectures. If you do not happen to have an S/390 system or a
|
||||
Blackfin development board handy, you can still perform the compilation
|
||||
step. A large set of cross compilers for x86 systems can be found at
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.kernel.org/pub/tools/crosstool/
|
||||
|
||||
Some time spent installing and using these compilers will help avoid
|
||||
embarrassment later.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4.3: DOCUMENTATION
|
||||
|
||||
Documentation has often been more the exception than the rule with kernel
|
||||
development. Even so, adequate documentation will help to ease the merging
|
||||
of new code into the kernel, make life easier for other developers, and
|
||||
will be helpful for your users. In many cases, the addition of
|
||||
documentation has become essentially mandatory.
|
||||
|
||||
The first piece of documentation for any patch is its associated
|
||||
changelog. Log entries should describe the problem being solved, the form
|
||||
of the solution, the people who worked on the patch, any relevant
|
||||
effects on performance, and anything else that might be needed to
|
||||
understand the patch.
|
||||
|
||||
Any code which adds a new user-space interface - including new sysfs or
|
||||
/proc files - should include documentation of that interface which enables
|
||||
user-space developers to know what they are working with. See
|
||||
Documentation/ABI/README for a description of how this documentation should
|
||||
be formatted and what information needs to be provided.
|
||||
|
||||
The file Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt describes all of the kernel's
|
||||
boot-time parameters. Any patch which adds new parameters should add the
|
||||
appropriate entries to this file.
|
||||
|
||||
Any new configuration options must be accompanied by help text which
|
||||
clearly explains the options and when the user might want to select them.
|
||||
|
||||
Internal API information for many subsystems is documented by way of
|
||||
specially-formatted comments; these comments can be extracted and formatted
|
||||
in a number of ways by the "kernel-doc" script. If you are working within
|
||||
a subsystem which has kerneldoc comments, you should maintain them and add
|
||||
them, as appropriate, for externally-available functions. Even in areas
|
||||
which have not been so documented, there is no harm in adding kerneldoc
|
||||
comments for the future; indeed, this can be a useful activity for
|
||||
beginning kernel developers. The format of these comments, along with some
|
||||
information on how to create kerneldoc templates can be found in the file
|
||||
Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
Anybody who reads through a significant amount of existing kernel code will
|
||||
note that, often, comments are most notable by their absence. Once again,
|
||||
the expectations for new code are higher than they were in the past;
|
||||
merging uncommented code will be harder. That said, there is little desire
|
||||
for verbosely-commented code. The code should, itself, be readable, with
|
||||
comments explaining the more subtle aspects.
|
||||
|
||||
Certain things should always be commented. Uses of memory barriers should
|
||||
be accompanied by a line explaining why the barrier is necessary. The
|
||||
locking rules for data structures generally need to be explained somewhere.
|
||||
Major data structures need comprehensive documentation in general.
|
||||
Non-obvious dependencies between separate bits of code should be pointed
|
||||
out. Anything which might tempt a code janitor to make an incorrect
|
||||
"cleanup" needs a comment saying why it is done the way it is. And so on.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4.4: INTERNAL API CHANGES
|
||||
|
||||
The binary interface provided by the kernel to user space cannot be broken
|
||||
except under the most severe circumstances. The kernel's internal
|
||||
programming interfaces, instead, are highly fluid and can be changed when
|
||||
the need arises. If you find yourself having to work around a kernel API,
|
||||
or simply not using a specific functionality because it does not meet your
|
||||
needs, that may be a sign that the API needs to change. As a kernel
|
||||
developer, you are empowered to make such changes.
|
||||
|
||||
There are, of course, some catches. API changes can be made, but they need
|
||||
to be well justified. So any patch making an internal API change should be
|
||||
accompanied by a description of what the change is and why it is
|
||||
necessary. This kind of change should also be broken out into a separate
|
||||
patch, rather than buried within a larger patch.
|
||||
|
||||
The other catch is that a developer who changes an internal API is
|
||||
generally charged with the task of fixing any code within the kernel tree
|
||||
which is broken by the change. For a widely-used function, this duty can
|
||||
lead to literally hundreds or thousands of changes - many of which are
|
||||
likely to conflict with work being done by other developers. Needless to
|
||||
say, this can be a large job, so it is best to be sure that the
|
||||
justification is solid.
|
||||
|
||||
When making an incompatible API change, one should, whenever possible,
|
||||
ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler.
|
||||
This will help you to be sure that you have found all in-tree uses of that
|
||||
interface. It will also alert developers of out-of-tree code that there is
|
||||
a change that they need to respond to. Supporting out-of-tree code is not
|
||||
something that kernel developers need to be worried about, but we also do
|
||||
not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it it needs to
|
||||
be.
|
278
Documentation/development-process/5.Posting
Normal file
278
Documentation/development-process/5.Posting
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
|
||||
5: POSTING PATCHES
|
||||
|
||||
Sooner or later, the time comes when your work is ready to be presented to
|
||||
the community for review and, eventually, inclusion into the mainline
|
||||
kernel. Unsurprisingly, the kernel development community has evolved a set
|
||||
of conventions and procedures which are used in the posting of patches;
|
||||
following them will make life much easier for everybody involved. This
|
||||
document will attempt to cover these expectations in reasonable detail;
|
||||
more information can also be found in the files SubmittingPatches,
|
||||
SubmittingDrivers, and SubmitChecklist in the kernel documentation
|
||||
directory.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5.1: WHEN TO POST
|
||||
|
||||
There is a constant temptation to avoid posting patches before they are
|
||||
completely "ready." For simple patches, that is not a problem. If the
|
||||
work being done is complex, though, there is a lot to be gained by getting
|
||||
feedback from the community before the work is complete. So you should
|
||||
consider posting in-progress work, or even making a git tree available so
|
||||
that interested developers can catch up with your work at any time.
|
||||
|
||||
When posting code which is not yet considered ready for inclusion, it is a
|
||||
good idea to say so in the posting itself. Also mention any major work
|
||||
which remains to be done and any known problems. Fewer people will look at
|
||||
patches which are known to be half-baked, but those who do will come in
|
||||
with the idea that they can help you drive the work in the right direction.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5.2: BEFORE CREATING PATCHES
|
||||
|
||||
There are a number of things which should be done before you consider
|
||||
sending patches to the development community. These include:
|
||||
|
||||
- Test the code to the extent that you can. Make use of the kernel's
|
||||
debugging tools, ensure that the kernel will build with all reasonable
|
||||
combinations of configuration options, use cross-compilers to build for
|
||||
different architectures, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
- Make sure your code is compliant with the kernel coding style
|
||||
guidelines.
|
||||
|
||||
- Does your change have performance implications? If so, you should run
|
||||
benchmarks showing what the impact (or benefit) of your change is; a
|
||||
summary of the results should be included with the patch.
|
||||
|
||||
- Be sure that you have the right to post the code. If this work was done
|
||||
for an employer, the employer likely has a right to the work and must be
|
||||
agreeable with its release under the GPL.
|
||||
|
||||
As a general rule, putting in some extra thought before posting code almost
|
||||
always pays back the effort in short order.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5.3: PATCH PREPARATION
|
||||
|
||||
The preparation of patches for posting can be a surprising amount of work,
|
||||
but, once again, attempting to save time here is not generally advisable
|
||||
even in the short term.
|
||||
|
||||
Patches must be prepared against a specific version of the kernel. As a
|
||||
general rule, a patch should be based on the current mainline as found in
|
||||
Linus's git tree. It may become necessary to make versions against -mm,
|
||||
linux-next, or a subsystem tree, though, to facilitate wider testing and
|
||||
review. Depending on the area of your patch and what is going on
|
||||
elsewhere, basing a patch against these other trees can require a
|
||||
significant amount of work resolving conflicts and dealing with API
|
||||
changes.
|
||||
|
||||
Only the most simple changes should be formatted as a single patch;
|
||||
everything else should be made as a logical series of changes. Splitting
|
||||
up patches is a bit of an art; some developers spend a long time figuring
|
||||
out how to do it in the way that the community expects. There are a few
|
||||
rules of thumb, however, which can help considerably:
|
||||
|
||||
- The patch series you post will almost certainly not be the series of
|
||||
changes found in your working revision control system. Instead, the
|
||||
changes you have made need to be considered in their final form, then
|
||||
split apart in ways which make sense. The developers are interested in
|
||||
discrete, self-contained changes, not the path you took to get to those
|
||||
changes.
|
||||
|
||||
- Each logically independent change should be formatted as a separate
|
||||
patch. These changes can be small ("add a field to this structure") or
|
||||
large (adding a significant new driver, for example), but they should be
|
||||
conceptually small and amenable to a one-line description. Each patch
|
||||
should make a specific change which can be reviewed on its own and
|
||||
verified to do what it says it does.
|
||||
|
||||
- As a way of restating the guideline above: do not mix different types of
|
||||
changes in the same patch. If a single patch fixes a critical security
|
||||
bug, rearranges a few structures, and reformats the code, there is a
|
||||
good chance that it will be passed over and the important fix will be
|
||||
lost.
|
||||
|
||||
- Each patch should yield a kernel which builds and runs properly; if your
|
||||
patch series is interrupted in the middle, the result should still be a
|
||||
working kernel. Partial application of a patch series is a common
|
||||
scenario when the "git bisect" tool is used to find regressions; if the
|
||||
result is a broken kernel, you will make life harder for developers and
|
||||
users who are engaging in the noble work of tracking down problems.
|
||||
|
||||
- Do not overdo it, though. One developer recently posted a set of edits
|
||||
to a single file as 500 separate patches - an act which did not make him
|
||||
the most popular person on the kernel mailing list. A single patch can
|
||||
be reasonably large as long as it still contains a single *logical*
|
||||
change.
|
||||
|
||||
- It can be tempting to add a whole new infrastructure with a series of
|
||||
patches, but to leave that infrastructure unused until the final patch
|
||||
in the series enables the whole thing. This temptation should be
|
||||
avoided if possible; if that series adds regressions, bisection will
|
||||
finger the last patch as the one which caused the problem, even though
|
||||
the real bug is elsewhere. Whenever possible, a patch which adds new
|
||||
code should make that code active immediately.
|
||||
|
||||
Working to create the perfect patch series can be a frustrating process
|
||||
which takes quite a bit of time and thought after the "real work" has been
|
||||
done. When done properly, though, it is time well spent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5.4: PATCH FORMATTING
|
||||
|
||||
So now you have a perfect series of patches for posting, but the work is
|
||||
not done quite yet. Each patch needs to be formatted into a message which
|
||||
quickly and clearly communicates its purpose to the rest of the world. To
|
||||
that end, each patch will be composed of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
- An optional "From" line naming the author of the patch. This line is
|
||||
only necessary if you are passing on somebody else's patch via email,
|
||||
but it never hurts to add it when in doubt.
|
||||
|
||||
- A one-line description of what the patch does. This message should be
|
||||
enough for a reader who sees it with no other context to figure out the
|
||||
scope of the patch; it is the line that will show up in the "short form"
|
||||
changelogs. This message is usually formatted with the relevant
|
||||
subsystem name first, followed by the purpose of the patch. For
|
||||
example:
|
||||
|
||||
gpio: fix build on CONFIG_GPIO_SYSFS=n
|
||||
|
||||
- A blank line followed by a detailed description of the contents of the
|
||||
patch. This description can be as long as is required; it should say
|
||||
what the patch does and why it should be applied to the kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
- One or more tag lines, with, at a minimum, one Signed-off-by: line from
|
||||
the author of the patch. Tags will be described in more detail below.
|
||||
|
||||
The above three items should, normally, be the text used when committing
|
||||
the change to a revision control system. They are followed by:
|
||||
|
||||
- The patch itself, in the unified ("-u") patch format. Using the "-p"
|
||||
option to diff will associate function names with changes, making the
|
||||
resulting patch easier for others to read.
|
||||
|
||||
You should avoid including changes to irrelevant files (those generated by
|
||||
the build process, for example, or editor backup files) in the patch. The
|
||||
file "dontdiff" in the Documentation directory can help in this regard;
|
||||
pass it to diff with the "-X" option.
|
||||
|
||||
The tags mentioned above are used to describe how various developers have
|
||||
been associated with the development of this patch. They are described in
|
||||
detail in the SubmittingPatches document; what follows here is a brief
|
||||
summary. Each of these lines has the format:
|
||||
|
||||
tag: Full Name <email address> optional-other-stuff
|
||||
|
||||
The tags in common use are:
|
||||
|
||||
- Signed-off-by: this is a developer's certification that he or she has
|
||||
the right to submit the patch for inclusion into the kernel. It is an
|
||||
agreement to the Developer's Certificate of Origin, the full text of
|
||||
which can be found in Documentation/SubmittingPatches. Code without a
|
||||
proper signoff cannot be merged into the mainline.
|
||||
|
||||
- Acked-by: indicates an agreement by another developer (often a
|
||||
maintainer of the relevant code) that the patch is appropriate for
|
||||
inclusion into the kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
- Tested-by: states that the named person has tested the patch and found
|
||||
it to work.
|
||||
|
||||
- Reviewed-by: the named developer has reviewed the patch for correctness;
|
||||
see the reviewer's statement in Documentation/SubmittingPatches for more
|
||||
detail.
|
||||
|
||||
- Reported-by: names a user who reported a problem which is fixed by this
|
||||
patch; this tag is used to give credit to the (often underappreciated)
|
||||
people who test our code and let us know when things do not work
|
||||
correctly.
|
||||
|
||||
- Cc: the named person received a copy of the patch and had the
|
||||
opportunity to comment on it.
|
||||
|
||||
Be careful in the addition of tags to your patches: only Cc: is appropriate
|
||||
for addition without the explicit permission of the person named.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5.5: SENDING THE PATCH
|
||||
|
||||
Before you mail your patches, there are a couple of other things you should
|
||||
take care of:
|
||||
|
||||
- Are you sure that your mailer will not corrupt the patches? Patches
|
||||
which have had gratuitous white-space changes or line wrapping performed
|
||||
by the mail client will not apply at the other end, and often will not
|
||||
be examined in any detail. If there is any doubt at all, mail the patch
|
||||
to yourself and convince yourself that it shows up intact.
|
||||
|
||||
Documentation/email-clients.txt has some helpful hints on making
|
||||
specific mail clients work for sending patches.
|
||||
|
||||
- Are you sure your patch is free of silly mistakes? You should always
|
||||
run patches through scripts/checkpatch.pl and address the complaints it
|
||||
comes up with. Please bear in mind that checkpatch.pl, while being the
|
||||
embodiment of a fair amount of thought about what kernel patches should
|
||||
look like, is not smarter than you. If fixing a checkpatch.pl complaint
|
||||
would make the code worse, don't do it.
|
||||
|
||||
Patches should always be sent as plain text. Please do not send them as
|
||||
attachments; that makes it much harder for reviewers to quote sections of
|
||||
the patch in their replies. Instead, just put the patch directly into your
|
||||
message.
|
||||
|
||||
When mailing patches, it is important to send copies to anybody who might
|
||||
be interested in it. Unlike some other projects, the kernel encourages
|
||||
people to err on the side of sending too many copies; don't assume that the
|
||||
relevant people will see your posting on the mailing lists. In particular,
|
||||
copies should go to:
|
||||
|
||||
- The maintainer(s) of the affected subsystem(s). As described earlier,
|
||||
the MAINTAINERS file is the first place to look for these people.
|
||||
|
||||
- Other developers who have been working in the same area - especially
|
||||
those who might be working there now. Using git to see who else has
|
||||
modified the files you are working on can be helpful.
|
||||
|
||||
- If you are responding to a bug report or a feature request, copy the
|
||||
original poster as well.
|
||||
|
||||
- Send a copy to the relevant mailing list, or, if nothing else applies,
|
||||
the linux-kernel list.
|
||||
|
||||
- If you are fixing a bug, think about whether the fix should go into the
|
||||
next stable update. If so, stable@kernel.org should get a copy of the
|
||||
patch. Also add a "Cc: stable@kernel.org" to the tags within the patch
|
||||
itself; that will cause the stable team to get a notification when your
|
||||
fix goes into the mainline.
|
||||
|
||||
When selecting recipients for a patch, it is good to have an idea of who
|
||||
you think will eventually accept the patch and get it merged. While it
|
||||
is possible to send patches directly to Linus Torvalds and have him merge
|
||||
them, things are not normally done that way. Linus is busy, and there are
|
||||
subsystem maintainers who watch over specific parts of the kernel. Usually
|
||||
you will be wanting that maintainer to merge your patches. If there is no
|
||||
obvious maintainer, Andrew Morton is often the patch target of last resort.
|
||||
|
||||
Patches need good subject lines. The canonical format for a patch line is
|
||||
something like:
|
||||
|
||||
[PATCH nn/mm] subsys: one-line description of the patch
|
||||
|
||||
where "nn" is the ordinal number of the patch, "mm" is the total number of
|
||||
patches in the series, and "subsys" is the name of the affected subsystem.
|
||||
Clearly, nn/mm can be omitted for a single, standalone patch.
|
||||
|
||||
If you have a significant series of patches, it is customary to send an
|
||||
introductory description as part zero. This convention is not universally
|
||||
followed though; if you use it, remember that information in the
|
||||
introduction does not make it into the kernel changelogs. So please ensure
|
||||
that the patches, themselves, have complete changelog information.
|
||||
|
||||
In general, the second and following parts of a multi-part patch should be
|
||||
sent as a reply to the first part so that they all thread together at the
|
||||
receiving end. Tools like git and quilt have commands to mail out a set of
|
||||
patches with the proper threading. If you have a long series, though, and
|
||||
are using git, please provide the --no-chain-reply-to option to avoid
|
||||
creating exceptionally deep nesting.
|
202
Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough
Normal file
202
Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
|
||||
6: FOLLOWTHROUGH
|
||||
|
||||
At this point, you have followed the guidelines given so far and, with the
|
||||
addition of your own engineering skills, have posted a perfect series of
|
||||
patches. One of the biggest mistakes that even experienced kernel
|
||||
developers can make is to conclude that their work is now done. In truth,
|
||||
posting patches indicates a transition into the next stage of the process,
|
||||
with, possibly, quite a bit of work yet to be done.
|
||||
|
||||
It is a rare patch which is so good at its first posting that there is no
|
||||
room for improvement. The kernel development process recognizes this fact,
|
||||
and, as a result, is heavily oriented toward the improvement of posted
|
||||
code. You, as the author of that code, will be expected to work with the
|
||||
kernel community to ensure that your code is up to the kernel's quality
|
||||
standards. A failure to participate in this process is quite likely to
|
||||
prevent the inclusion of your patches into the mainline.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
6.1: WORKING WITH REVIEWERS
|
||||
|
||||
A patch of any significance will result in a number of comments from other
|
||||
developers as they review the code. Working with reviewers can be, for
|
||||
many developers, the most intimidating part of the kernel development
|
||||
process. Life can be made much easier, though, if you keep a few things in
|
||||
mind:
|
||||
|
||||
- If you have explained your patch well, reviewers will understand its
|
||||
value and why you went to the trouble of writing it. But that value
|
||||
will not keep them from asking a fundamental question: what will it be
|
||||
like to maintain a kernel with this code in it five or ten years later?
|
||||
Many of the changes you may be asked to make - from coding style tweaks
|
||||
to substantial rewrites - come from the understanding that Linux will
|
||||
still be around and under development a decade from now.
|
||||
|
||||
- Code review is hard work, and it is a relatively thankless occupation;
|
||||
people remember who wrote kernel code, but there is little lasting fame
|
||||
for those who reviewed it. So reviewers can get grumpy, especially when
|
||||
they see the same mistakes being made over and over again. If you get a
|
||||
review which seems angry, insulting, or outright offensive, resist the
|
||||
impulse to respond in kind. Code review is about the code, not about
|
||||
the people, and code reviewers are not attacking you personally.
|
||||
|
||||
- Similarly, code reviewers are not trying to promote their employers'
|
||||
agendas at the expense of your own. Kernel developers often expect to
|
||||
be working on the kernel years from now, but they understand that their
|
||||
employer could change. They truly are, almost without exception,
|
||||
working toward the creation of the best kernel they can; they are not
|
||||
trying to create discomfort for their employers' competitors.
|
||||
|
||||
What all of this comes down to is that, when reviewers send you comments,
|
||||
you need to pay attention to the technical observations that they are
|
||||
making. Do not let their form of expression or your own pride keep that
|
||||
from happening. When you get review comments on a patch, take the time to
|
||||
understand what the reviewer is trying to say. If possible, fix the things
|
||||
that the reviewer is asking you to fix. And respond back to the reviewer:
|
||||
thank them, and describe how you will answer their questions.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that you do not have to agree with every change suggested by
|
||||
reviewers. If you believe that the reviewer has misunderstood your code,
|
||||
explain what is really going on. If you have a technical objection to a
|
||||
suggested change, describe it and justify your solution to the problem. If
|
||||
your explanations make sense, the reviewer will accept them. Should your
|
||||
explanation not prove persuasive, though, especially if others start to
|
||||
agree with the reviewer, take some time to think things over again. It can
|
||||
be easy to become blinded by your own solution to a problem to the point
|
||||
that you don't realize that something is fundamentally wrong or, perhaps,
|
||||
you're not even solving the right problem.
|
||||
|
||||
One fatal mistake is to ignore review comments in the hope that they will
|
||||
go away. They will not go away. If you repost code without having
|
||||
responded to the comments you got the time before, you're likely to find
|
||||
that your patches go nowhere.
|
||||
|
||||
Speaking of reposting code: please bear in mind that reviewers are not
|
||||
going to remember all the details of the code you posted the last time
|
||||
around. So it is always a good idea to remind reviewers of previously
|
||||
raised issues and how you dealt with them; the patch changelog is a good
|
||||
place for this kind of information. Reviewers should not have to search
|
||||
through list archives to familiarize themselves with what was said last
|
||||
time; if you help them get a running start, they will be in a better mood
|
||||
when they revisit your code.
|
||||
|
||||
What if you've tried to do everything right and things still aren't going
|
||||
anywhere? Most technical disagreements can be resolved through discussion,
|
||||
but there are times when somebody simply has to make a decision. If you
|
||||
honestly believe that this decision is going against you wrongly, you can
|
||||
always try appealing to a higher power. As of this writing, that higher
|
||||
power tends to be Andrew Morton. Andrew has a great deal of respect in the
|
||||
kernel development community; he can often unjam a situation which seems to
|
||||
be hopelessly blocked. Appealing to Andrew should not be done lightly,
|
||||
though, and not before all other alternatives have been explored. And bear
|
||||
in mind, of course, that he may not agree with you either.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
6.2: WHAT HAPPENS NEXT
|
||||
|
||||
If a patch is considered to be a good thing to add to the kernel, and once
|
||||
most of the review issues have been resolved, the next step is usually
|
||||
entry into a subsystem maintainer's tree. How that works varies from one
|
||||
subsystem to the next; each maintainer has his or her own way of doing
|
||||
things. In particular, there may be more than one tree - one, perhaps,
|
||||
dedicated to patches planned for the next merge window, and another for
|
||||
longer-term work.
|
||||
|
||||
For patches applying to areas for which there is no obvious subsystem tree
|
||||
(memory management patches, for example), the default tree often ends up
|
||||
being -mm. Patches which affect multiple subsystems can also end up going
|
||||
through the -mm tree.
|
||||
|
||||
Inclusion into a subsystem tree can bring a higher level of visibility to a
|
||||
patch. Now other developers working with that tree will get the patch by
|
||||
default. Subsystem trees typically feed into -mm and linux-next as well,
|
||||
making their contents visible to the development community as a whole. At
|
||||
this point, there's a good chance that you will get more comments from a
|
||||
new set of reviewers; these comments need to be answered as in the previous
|
||||
round.
|
||||
|
||||
What may also happen at this point, depending on the nature of your patch,
|
||||
is that conflicts with work being done by others turn up. In the worst
|
||||
case, heavy patch conflicts can result in some work being put on the back
|
||||
burner so that the remaining patches can be worked into shape and merged.
|
||||
Other times, conflict resolution will involve working with the other
|
||||
developers and, possibly, moving some patches between trees to ensure that
|
||||
everything applies cleanly. This work can be a pain, but count your
|
||||
blessings: before the advent of the linux-next tree, these conflicts often
|
||||
only turned up during the merge window and had to be addressed in a hurry.
|
||||
Now they can be resolved at leisure, before the merge window opens.
|
||||
|
||||
Some day, if all goes well, you'll log on and see that your patch has been
|
||||
merged into the mainline kernel. Congratulations! Once the celebration is
|
||||
complete (and you have added yourself to the MAINTAINERS file), though, it
|
||||
is worth remembering an important little fact: the job still is not done.
|
||||
Merging into the mainline brings its own challenges.
|
||||
|
||||
To begin with, the visibility of your patch has increased yet again. There
|
||||
may be a new round of comments from developers who had not been aware of
|
||||
the patch before. It may be tempting to ignore them, since there is no
|
||||
longer any question of your code being merged. Resist that temptation,
|
||||
though; you still need to be responsive to developers who have questions or
|
||||
suggestions.
|
||||
|
||||
More importantly, though: inclusion into the mainline puts your code into
|
||||
the hands of a much larger group of testers. Even if you have contributed
|
||||
a driver for hardware which is not yet available, you will be surprised by
|
||||
how many people will build your code into their kernels. And, of course,
|
||||
where there are testers, there will be bug reports.
|
||||
|
||||
The worst sort of bug reports are regressions. If your patch causes a
|
||||
regression, you'll find an uncomfortable number of eyes upon you;
|
||||
regressions need to be fixed as soon as possible. If you are unwilling or
|
||||
unable to fix the regression (and nobody else does it for you), your patch
|
||||
will almost certainly be removed during the stabilization period. Beyond
|
||||
negating all of the work you have done to get your patch into the mainline,
|
||||
having a patch pulled as the result of a failure to fix a regression could
|
||||
well make it harder for you to get work merged in the future.
|
||||
|
||||
After any regressions have been dealt with, there may be other, ordinary
|
||||
bugs to deal with. The stabilization period is your best opportunity to
|
||||
fix these bugs and ensure that your code's debut in a mainline kernel
|
||||
release is as solid as possible. So, please, answer bug reports, and fix
|
||||
the problems if at all possible. That's what the stabilization period is
|
||||
for; you can start creating cool new patches once any problems with the old
|
||||
ones have been taken care of.
|
||||
|
||||
And don't forget that there are other milestones which may also create bug
|
||||
reports: the next mainline stable release, when prominent distributors pick
|
||||
up a version of the kernel containing your patch, etc. Continuing to
|
||||
respond to these reports is a matter of basic pride in your work. If that
|
||||
is insufficient motivation, though, it's also worth considering that the
|
||||
development community remembers developers who lose interest in their code
|
||||
after it's merged. The next time you post a patch, they will be evaluating
|
||||
it with the assumption that you will not be around to maintain it
|
||||
afterward.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
6.3: OTHER THINGS THAT CAN HAPPEN
|
||||
|
||||
One day, you may open your mail client and see that somebody has mailed you
|
||||
a patch to your code. That is one of the advantages of having your code
|
||||
out there in the open, after all. If you agree with the patch, you can
|
||||
either forward it on to the subsystem maintainer (be sure to include a
|
||||
proper From: line so that the attribution is correct, and add a signoff of
|
||||
your own), or send an Acked-by: response back and let the original poster
|
||||
send it upward.
|
||||
|
||||
If you disagree with the patch, send a polite response explaining why. If
|
||||
possible, tell the author what changes need to be made to make the patch
|
||||
acceptable to you. There is a certain resistance to merging patches which
|
||||
are opposed by the author and maintainer of the code, but it only goes so
|
||||
far. If you are seen as needlessly blocking good work, those patches will
|
||||
eventually flow around you and get into the mainline anyway. In the Linux
|
||||
kernel, nobody has absolute veto power over any code. Except maybe Linus.
|
||||
|
||||
On very rare occasion, you may see something completely different: another
|
||||
developer posts a different solution to your problem. At that point,
|
||||
chances are that one of the two patches will not be merged, and "mine was
|
||||
here first" is not considered to be a compelling technical argument. If
|
||||
somebody else's patch displaces yours and gets into the mainline, there is
|
||||
really only one way to respond: be pleased that your problem got solved and
|
||||
get on with your work. Having one's work shoved aside in this manner can
|
||||
be hurtful and discouraging, but the community will remember your reaction
|
||||
long after they have forgotten whose patch actually got merged.
|
173
Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics
Normal file
173
Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
|
||||
7: ADVANCED TOPICS
|
||||
|
||||
At this point, hopefully, you have a handle on how the development process
|
||||
works. There is still more to learn, however! This section will cover a
|
||||
number of topics which can be helpful for developers wanting to become a
|
||||
regular part of the Linux kernel development process.
|
||||
|
||||
7.1: MANAGING PATCHES WITH GIT
|
||||
|
||||
The use of distributed version control for the kernel began in early 2002,
|
||||
when Linus first started playing with the proprietary BitKeeper
|
||||
application. While BitKeeper was controversial, the approach to software
|
||||
version management it embodied most certainly was not. Distributed version
|
||||
control enabled an immediate acceleration of the kernel development
|
||||
project. In current times, there are several free alternatives to
|
||||
BitKeeper. For better or for worse, the kernel project has settled on git
|
||||
as its tool of choice.
|
||||
|
||||
Managing patches with git can make life much easier for the developer,
|
||||
especially as the volume of those patches grows. Git also has its rough
|
||||
edges and poses certain hazards; it is a young and powerful tool which is
|
||||
still being civilized by its developers. This document will not attempt to
|
||||
teach the reader how to use git; that would be sufficient material for a
|
||||
long document in its own right. Instead, the focus here will be on how git
|
||||
fits into the kernel development process in particular. Developers who
|
||||
wish to come up to speed with git will find more information at:
|
||||
|
||||
http://git.or.cz/
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html
|
||||
|
||||
and on various tutorials found on the web.
|
||||
|
||||
The first order of business is to read the above sites and get a solid
|
||||
understanding of how git works before trying to use it to make patches
|
||||
available to others. A git-using developer should be able to obtain a copy
|
||||
of the mainline repository, explore the revision history, commit changes to
|
||||
the tree, use branches, etc. An understanding of git's tools for the
|
||||
rewriting of history (such as rebase) is also useful. Git comes with its
|
||||
own terminology and concepts; a new user of git should know about refs,
|
||||
remote branches, the index, fast-forward merges, pushes and pulls, detached
|
||||
heads, etc. It can all be a little intimidating at the outset, but the
|
||||
concepts are not that hard to grasp with a bit of study.
|
||||
|
||||
Using git to generate patches for submission by email can be a good
|
||||
exercise while coming up to speed.
|
||||
|
||||
When you are ready to start putting up git trees for others to look at, you
|
||||
will, of course, need a server that can be pulled from. Setting up such a
|
||||
server with git-daemon is relatively straightforward if you have a system
|
||||
which is accessible to the Internet. Otherwise, free, public hosting sites
|
||||
(Github, for example) are starting to appear on the net. Established
|
||||
developers can get an account on kernel.org, but those are not easy to come
|
||||
by; see http://kernel.org/faq/ for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
The normal git workflow involves the use of a lot of branches. Each line
|
||||
of development can be separated into a separate "topic branch" and
|
||||
maintained independently. Branches in git are cheap, there is no reason to
|
||||
not make free use of them. And, in any case, you should not do your
|
||||
development in any branch which you intend to ask others to pull from.
|
||||
Publicly-available branches should be created with care; merge in patches
|
||||
from development branches when they are in complete form and ready to go -
|
||||
not before.
|
||||
|
||||
Git provides some powerful tools which can allow you to rewrite your
|
||||
development history. An inconvenient patch (one which breaks bisection,
|
||||
say, or which has some other sort of obvious bug) can be fixed in place or
|
||||
made to disappear from the history entirely. A patch series can be
|
||||
rewritten as if it had been written on top of today's mainline, even though
|
||||
you have been working on it for months. Changes can be transparently
|
||||
shifted from one branch to another. And so on. Judicious use of git's
|
||||
ability to revise history can help in the creation of clean patch sets with
|
||||
fewer problems.
|
||||
|
||||
Excessive use of this capability can lead to other problems, though, beyond
|
||||
a simple obsession for the creation of the perfect project history.
|
||||
Rewriting history will rewrite the changes contained in that history,
|
||||
turning a tested (hopefully) kernel tree into an untested one. But, beyond
|
||||
that, developers cannot easily collaborate if they do not have a shared
|
||||
view of the project history; if you rewrite history which other developers
|
||||
have pulled into their repositories, you will make life much more difficult
|
||||
for those developers. So a simple rule of thumb applies here: history
|
||||
which has been exported to others should generally be seen as immutable
|
||||
thereafter.
|
||||
|
||||
So, once you push a set of changes to your publicly-available server, those
|
||||
changes should not be rewritten. Git will attempt to enforce this rule if
|
||||
you try to push changes which do not result in a fast-forward merge
|
||||
(i.e. changes which do not share the same history). It is possible to
|
||||
override this check, and there may be times when it is necessary to rewrite
|
||||
an exported tree. Moving changesets between trees to avoid conflicts in
|
||||
linux-next is one example. But such actions should be rare. This is one
|
||||
of the reasons why development should be done in private branches (which
|
||||
can be rewritten if necessary) and only moved into public branches when
|
||||
it's in a reasonably advanced state.
|
||||
|
||||
As the mainline (or other tree upon which a set of changes is based)
|
||||
advances, it is tempting to merge with that tree to stay on the leading
|
||||
edge. For a private branch, rebasing can be an easy way to keep up with
|
||||
another tree, but rebasing is not an option once a tree is exported to the
|
||||
world. Once that happens, a full merge must be done. Merging occasionally
|
||||
makes good sense, but overly frequent merges can clutter the history
|
||||
needlessly. Suggested technique in this case is to merge infrequently, and
|
||||
generally only at specific release points (such as a mainline -rc
|
||||
release). If you are nervous about specific changes, you can always
|
||||
perform test merges in a private branch. The git "rerere" tool can be
|
||||
useful in such situations; it remembers how merge conflicts were resolved
|
||||
so that you don't have to do the same work twice.
|
||||
|
||||
One of the biggest recurring complaints about tools like git is this: the
|
||||
mass movement of patches from one repository to another makes it easy to
|
||||
slip in ill-advised changes which go into the mainline below the review
|
||||
radar. Kernel developers tend to get unhappy when they see that kind of
|
||||
thing happening; putting up a git tree with unreviewed or off-topic patches
|
||||
can affect your ability to get trees pulled in the future. Quoting Linus:
|
||||
|
||||
You can send me patches, but for me to pull a git patch from you, I
|
||||
need to know that you know what you're doing, and I need to be able
|
||||
to trust things *without* then having to go and check every
|
||||
individual change by hand.
|
||||
|
||||
(http://lwn.net/Articles/224135/).
|
||||
|
||||
To avoid this kind of situation, ensure that all patches within a given
|
||||
branch stick closely to the associated topic; a "driver fixes" branch
|
||||
should not be making changes to the core memory management code. And, most
|
||||
importantly, do not use a git tree to bypass the review process. Post an
|
||||
occasional summary of the tree to the relevant list, and, when the time is
|
||||
right, request that the tree be included in linux-next.
|
||||
|
||||
If and when others start to send patches for inclusion into your tree,
|
||||
don't forget to review them. Also ensure that you maintain the correct
|
||||
authorship information; the git "am" tool does its best in this regard, but
|
||||
you may have to add a "From:" line to the patch if it has been relayed to
|
||||
you via a third party.
|
||||
|
||||
When requesting a pull, be sure to give all the relevant information: where
|
||||
your tree is, what branch to pull, and what changes will result from the
|
||||
pull. The git request-pull command can be helpful in this regard; it will
|
||||
format the request as other developers expect, and will also check to be
|
||||
sure that you have remembered to push those changes to the public server.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7.2: REVIEWING PATCHES
|
||||
|
||||
Some readers will certainly object to putting this section with "advanced
|
||||
topics" on the grounds that even beginning kernel developers should be
|
||||
reviewing patches. It is certainly true that there is no better way to
|
||||
learn how to program in the kernel environment than by looking at code
|
||||
posted by others. In addition, reviewers are forever in short supply; by
|
||||
looking at code you can make a significant contribution to the process as a
|
||||
whole.
|
||||
|
||||
Reviewing code can be an intimidating prospect, especially for a new kernel
|
||||
developer who may well feel nervous about questioning code - in public -
|
||||
which has been posted by those with more experience. Even code written by
|
||||
the most experienced developers can be improved, though. Perhaps the best
|
||||
piece of advice for reviewers (all reviewers) is this: phrase review
|
||||
comments as questions rather than criticisms. Asking "how does the lock
|
||||
get released in this path?" will always work better than stating "the
|
||||
locking here is wrong."
|
||||
|
||||
Different developers will review code from different points of view. Some
|
||||
are mostly concerned with coding style and whether code lines have trailing
|
||||
white space. Others will focus primarily on whether the change implemented
|
||||
by the patch as a whole is a good thing for the kernel or not. Yet others
|
||||
will check for problematic locking, excessive stack usage, possible
|
||||
security issues, duplication of code found elsewhere, adequate
|
||||
documentation, adverse effects on performance, user-space ABI changes, etc.
|
||||
All types of review, if they lead to better code going into the kernel, are
|
||||
welcome and worthwhile.
|
||||
|
||||
|
74
Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion
Normal file
74
Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
8: FOR MORE INFORMATION
|
||||
|
||||
There are numerous sources of information on Linux kernel development and
|
||||
related topics. First among those will always be the Documentation
|
||||
directory found in the kernel source distribution. The top-level HOWTO
|
||||
file is an important starting point; SubmittingPatches and
|
||||
SubmittingDrivers are also something which all kernel developers should
|
||||
read. Many internal kernel APIs are documented using the kerneldoc
|
||||
mechanism; "make htmldocs" or "make pdfdocs" can be used to generate those
|
||||
documents in HTML or PDF format (though the version of TeX shipped by some
|
||||
distributions runs into internal limits and fails to process the documents
|
||||
properly).
|
||||
|
||||
Various web sites discuss kernel development at all levels of detail. Your
|
||||
author would like to humbly suggest http://lwn.net/ as a source;
|
||||
information on many specific kernel topics can be found via the LWN kernel
|
||||
index at:
|
||||
|
||||
http://lwn.net/Kernel/Index/
|
||||
|
||||
Beyond that, a valuable resource for kernel developers is:
|
||||
|
||||
http://kernelnewbies.org/
|
||||
|
||||
Information about the linux-next tree gathers at:
|
||||
|
||||
http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/
|
||||
|
||||
And, of course, one should not forget http://kernel.org/, the definitive
|
||||
location for kernel release information.
|
||||
|
||||
There are a number of books on kernel development:
|
||||
|
||||
Linux Device Drivers, 3rd Edition (Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro
|
||||
Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman). Online at
|
||||
http://lwn.net/Kernel/LDD3/.
|
||||
|
||||
Linux Kernel Development (Robert Love).
|
||||
|
||||
Understanding the Linux Kernel (Daniel Bovet and Marco Cesati).
|
||||
|
||||
All of these books suffer from a common fault, though: they tend to be
|
||||
somewhat obsolete by the time they hit the shelves, and they have been on
|
||||
the shelves for a while now. Still, there is quite a bit of good
|
||||
information to be found there.
|
||||
|
||||
Documentation for git can be found at:
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
9: CONCLUSION
|
||||
|
||||
Congratulations to anybody who has made it through this long-winded
|
||||
document. Hopefully it has provided a helpful understanding of how the
|
||||
Linux kernel is developed and how you can participate in that process.
|
||||
|
||||
In the end, it's the participation that matters. Any open source software
|
||||
project is no more than the sum of what its contributors put into it. The
|
||||
Linux kernel has progressed as quickly and as well as it has because it has
|
||||
been helped by an impressively large group of developers, all of whom are
|
||||
working to make it better. The kernel is a premier example of what can be
|
||||
done when thousands of people work together toward a common goal.
|
||||
|
||||
The kernel can always benefit from a larger developer base, though. There
|
||||
is always more work to do. But, just as importantly, most other
|
||||
participants in the Linux ecosystem can benefit through contributing to the
|
||||
kernel. Getting code into the mainline is the key to higher code quality,
|
||||
lower maintenance and distribution costs, a higher level of influence over
|
||||
the direction of kernel development, and more. It is a situation where
|
||||
everybody involved wins. Fire up your editor and come join us; you will be
|
||||
more than welcome.
|
@ -2571,6 +2571,9 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
|
||||
160 = /dev/usb/legousbtower0 1st USB Legotower device
|
||||
...
|
||||
175 = /dev/usb/legousbtower15 16th USB Legotower device
|
||||
176 = /dev/usb/usbtmc1 First USB TMC device
|
||||
...
|
||||
192 = /dev/usb/usbtmc16 16th USB TMC device
|
||||
240 = /dev/usb/dabusb0 First daubusb device
|
||||
...
|
||||
243 = /dev/usb/dabusb3 Fourth dabusb device
|
||||
|
@ -2,11 +2,13 @@
|
||||
*.aux
|
||||
*.bin
|
||||
*.cpio
|
||||
*.css
|
||||
*.csp
|
||||
*.dsp
|
||||
*.dvi
|
||||
*.elf
|
||||
*.eps
|
||||
*.fw.gen.S
|
||||
*.fw
|
||||
*.gen.S
|
||||
*.gif
|
||||
*.grep
|
||||
*.grp
|
||||
@ -30,6 +32,7 @@
|
||||
*.s
|
||||
*.sgml
|
||||
*.so
|
||||
*.so.dbg
|
||||
*.symtypes
|
||||
*.tab.c
|
||||
*.tab.h
|
||||
@ -38,24 +41,17 @@
|
||||
*.xml
|
||||
*_MODULES
|
||||
*_vga16.c
|
||||
*cscope*
|
||||
*~
|
||||
*.9
|
||||
*.9.gz
|
||||
.*
|
||||
.cscope
|
||||
.gitignore
|
||||
.mailmap
|
||||
.mm
|
||||
53c700_d.h
|
||||
53c8xx_d.h*
|
||||
COPYING
|
||||
CREDITS
|
||||
CVS
|
||||
ChangeSet
|
||||
Image
|
||||
Kerntypes
|
||||
MODS.txt
|
||||
Module.markers
|
||||
Module.symvers
|
||||
PENDING
|
||||
SCCS
|
||||
@ -73,7 +69,9 @@ autoconf.h*
|
||||
bbootsect
|
||||
bin2c
|
||||
binkernel.spec
|
||||
binoffset
|
||||
bootsect
|
||||
bounds.h
|
||||
bsetup
|
||||
btfixupprep
|
||||
build
|
||||
@ -89,39 +87,36 @@ config_data.h*
|
||||
config_data.gz*
|
||||
conmakehash
|
||||
consolemap_deftbl.c*
|
||||
cpustr.h
|
||||
crc32table.h*
|
||||
cscope.*
|
||||
defkeymap.c*
|
||||
defkeymap.c
|
||||
devlist.h*
|
||||
docproc
|
||||
dummy_sym.c*
|
||||
elf2ecoff
|
||||
elfconfig.h*
|
||||
filelist
|
||||
fixdep
|
||||
fore200e_mkfirm
|
||||
fore200e_pca_fw.c*
|
||||
gconf
|
||||
gen-devlist
|
||||
gen-kdb_cmds.c*
|
||||
gen_crc32table
|
||||
gen_init_cpio
|
||||
genksyms
|
||||
gentbl
|
||||
*_gray256.c
|
||||
ihex2fw
|
||||
ikconfig.h*
|
||||
initramfs_data.cpio
|
||||
initramfs_data.cpio.gz
|
||||
initramfs_list
|
||||
kallsyms
|
||||
kconfig
|
||||
kconfig.tk
|
||||
keywords.c*
|
||||
keywords.c
|
||||
ksym.c*
|
||||
ksym.h*
|
||||
kxgettext
|
||||
lkc_defs.h
|
||||
lex.c*
|
||||
lex.c
|
||||
lex.*.c
|
||||
logo_*.c
|
||||
logo_*_clut224.c
|
||||
@ -130,7 +125,6 @@ lxdialog
|
||||
mach-types
|
||||
mach-types.h
|
||||
machtypes.h
|
||||
make_times_h
|
||||
map
|
||||
maui_boot.h
|
||||
mconf
|
||||
@ -138,6 +132,7 @@ miboot*
|
||||
mk_elfconfig
|
||||
mkboot
|
||||
mkbugboot
|
||||
mkcpustr
|
||||
mkdep
|
||||
mkprep
|
||||
mktables
|
||||
@ -145,11 +140,12 @@ mktree
|
||||
modpost
|
||||
modules.order
|
||||
modversions.h*
|
||||
ncscope.*
|
||||
offset.h
|
||||
offsets.h
|
||||
oui.c*
|
||||
parse.c*
|
||||
parse.h*
|
||||
parse.c
|
||||
parse.h
|
||||
patches*
|
||||
pca200e.bin
|
||||
pca200e_ecd.bin2
|
||||
@ -157,7 +153,7 @@ piggy.gz
|
||||
piggyback
|
||||
pnmtologo
|
||||
ppc_defs.h*
|
||||
promcon_tbl.c*
|
||||
promcon_tbl.c
|
||||
pss_boot.h
|
||||
qconf
|
||||
raid6altivec*.c
|
||||
@ -168,27 +164,38 @@ series
|
||||
setup
|
||||
setup.bin
|
||||
setup.elf
|
||||
sim710_d.h*
|
||||
sImage
|
||||
sm_tbl*
|
||||
split-include
|
||||
syscalltab.h
|
||||
tags
|
||||
tftpboot.img
|
||||
timeconst.h
|
||||
times.h*
|
||||
tkparse
|
||||
trix_boot.h
|
||||
utsrelease.h*
|
||||
vdso-syms.lds
|
||||
vdso.lds
|
||||
vdso32-int80-syms.lds
|
||||
vdso32-syms.lds
|
||||
vdso32-syscall-syms.lds
|
||||
vdso32-sysenter-syms.lds
|
||||
vdso32.lds
|
||||
vdso32.so.dbg
|
||||
vdso64.lds
|
||||
vdso64.so.dbg
|
||||
version.h*
|
||||
vmlinux
|
||||
vmlinux-*
|
||||
vmlinux.aout
|
||||
vmlinux*.lds*
|
||||
vmlinux*.scr
|
||||
vmlinux.lds
|
||||
vsyscall.lds
|
||||
vsyscall_32.lds
|
||||
wanxlfw.inc
|
||||
uImage
|
||||
unifdef
|
||||
wakeup.bin
|
||||
wakeup.elf
|
||||
wakeup.lds
|
||||
zImage*
|
||||
zconf.hash.c
|
||||
|
@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ graphics devices. These would include:
|
||||
Intel 915GM
|
||||
Intel 945G
|
||||
Intel 945GM
|
||||
Intel 945GME
|
||||
Intel 965G
|
||||
Intel 965GM
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ are either given on the kernel command line or as module parameters, e.g.:
|
||||
|
||||
video=uvesafb:1024x768-32,mtrr:3,ywrap (compiled into the kernel)
|
||||
|
||||
# modprobe uvesafb mode=1024x768-32 mtrr=3 scroll=ywrap (module)
|
||||
# modprobe uvesafb mode_option=1024x768-32 mtrr=3 scroll=ywrap (module)
|
||||
|
||||
Accepted options:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ vtotal:n
|
||||
<mode> The mode you want to set, in the standard modedb format. Refer to
|
||||
modedb.txt for a detailed description. When uvesafb is compiled as
|
||||
a module, the mode string should be provided as a value of the
|
||||
'mode' option.
|
||||
'mode_option' option.
|
||||
|
||||
vbemode:x
|
||||
Force the use of VBE mode x. The mode will only be set if it's
|
||||
|
870
Documentation/fb/viafb.modes
Normal file
870
Documentation/fb/viafb.modes
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,870 @@
|
||||
#
|
||||
#
|
||||
# These data are based on the CRTC parameters in
|
||||
#
|
||||
# VIA Integration Graphics Chip
|
||||
# (C) 2004 VIA Technologies Inc.
|
||||
#
|
||||
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 640x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (25.175 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 640 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 31.469 kHz 59.94 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 3.813 us 0.064 ms
|
||||
# 12 chars 2 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.636 us 0.318 ms
|
||||
# 2 chars 10 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.907 us 1.048 ms
|
||||
# 6 chars 33 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 25.422 us 15.253 ms
|
||||
# 80 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 6.356 us 1.430 ms
|
||||
# 20 chars 45 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative negative
|
||||
#
|
||||
|
||||
mode "640x480-60"
|
||||
# D: 25.175 MHz, H: 31.469 kHz, V: 59.94 Hz
|
||||
geometry 640 480 640 480 32
|
||||
timings 39722 48 16 33 10 96 2 endmode mode "480x640-60"
|
||||
# D: 24.823 MHz, H: 39.780 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 480 640 480 640 32 timings 39722 72 24 19 1 48 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 640x480, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.50 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 640 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 37.500 kHz 75.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.032 us 0.080 ms
|
||||
# 8 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.027 ms
|
||||
# 2 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 3.810 us 0.427 ms
|
||||
# 15 chars 16 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 20.317 us 12.800 ms
|
||||
# 80 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 6.349 us 0.533 ms
|
||||
# 25 chars 20 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative negative
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "640x480-75"
|
||||
# D: 31.50 MHz, H: 37.500 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 31747 120 16 16 1 64 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 640x480, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (36.000 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 640 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 43.269 kHz 85.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.556 us 0.069 ms
|
||||
# 7 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 1.556 us 0.023 ms
|
||||
# 7 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.222 us 0.578 ms
|
||||
# 10 chars 25 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 17.778 us 11.093 ms
|
||||
# 80 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 5.333 us 0.670 ms
|
||||
# 24 chars 29 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative negative
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "640x480-85"
|
||||
# D: 36.000 MHz, H: 43.269 kHz, V: 85.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 27777 80 56 25 1 56 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 640x480, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (43.163 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 640 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 50.900 kHz 100.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.483 us 0.058 ms
|
||||
# 8 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.927 us 0.019 ms
|
||||
# 5 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.409 us 0.475 ms
|
||||
# 13 chars 25 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 14.827 us 9.430 ms
|
||||
# 80 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 4.819 us 0.570 ms
|
||||
# 26 chars 29 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "640x480-100"
|
||||
# D: 43.163 MHz, H: 50.900 kHz, V: 100.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 23168 104 40 25 1 64 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 640x480, 120 Hz, Non-Interlaced (52.406 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 640 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 61.800 kHz 120.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.221 us 0.048 ms
|
||||
# 8 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.763 us 0.016 ms
|
||||
# 5 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.984 us 0.496 ms
|
||||
# 13 chars 31 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 12.212 us 7.767 ms
|
||||
# 80 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.969 us 0.566 ms
|
||||
# 26 chars 35 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "640x480-120"
|
||||
# D: 52.406 MHz, H: 61.800 kHz, V: 120.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 19081 104 40 31 1 64 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 720x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (26.880 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 720 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 30.000 kHz 60.241 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.679 us 0.099 ms
|
||||
# 9 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.595 us 0.033 ms
|
||||
# 2 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 3.274 us 0.462 ms
|
||||
# 11 chars 14 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 26.786 us 16.000 ms
|
||||
# 90 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 6.548 us 0.600 ms
|
||||
# 22 chars 18 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "720x480-60"
|
||||
# D: 26.880 MHz, H: 30.000 kHz, V: 60.24 Hz
|
||||
geometry 720 480 720 480 32 timings 37202 88 16 14 1 72 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 800x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (29.581 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 800 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 29.892 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.704 us 100.604 us
|
||||
# 10 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.541 us 33.535 us
|
||||
# 2 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 3.245 us 435.949 us
|
||||
# 12 chars 13 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 27.044 us 16.097 ms
|
||||
# 100 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 6.491 us 0.570 ms
|
||||
# 24 chars 17 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "800x480-60"
|
||||
# D: 29.500 MHz, H: 29.738 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 800 480 800 480 32 timings 33805 96 24 10 3 72 7 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 720x576, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (32.668 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 720 576
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 35.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.204 us 0.083 ms
|
||||
# 9 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.735 us 0.027 ms
|
||||
# 3 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.939 us 0.459 ms
|
||||
# 12 chars 17 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 22.040 us 16.080 ms
|
||||
# 90 chars 476 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 5.877 us 0.586 ms
|
||||
# 24 chars 21 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "720x576-60"
|
||||
# D: 32.668 MHz, H: 35.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 720 576 720 576 32 timings 30611 96 24 17 1 72 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 800x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (40.00 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 800 600
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 37.879 kHz 60.32 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 3.200 us 0.106 ms
|
||||
# 16 chars 4 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 1.000 us 0.026 ms
|
||||
# 5 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.200 us 0.607 ms
|
||||
# 11 chars 23 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 20.000 us 15.840 ms
|
||||
# 100 chars 600 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 6.400 us 0.739 ms
|
||||
# 32 chars 28 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "800x600-60"
|
||||
# D: 40.00 MHz, H: 37.879 kHz, V: 60.32 Hz
|
||||
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
|
||||
timings 25000 88 40 23 1 128 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 800x600, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (49.50 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 800 600
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 46.875 kHz 75.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.616 us 0.064 ms
|
||||
# 10 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.323 us 0.021 ms
|
||||
# 2 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 3.232 us 0.448 ms
|
||||
# 20 chars 21 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 16.162 us 12.800 ms
|
||||
# 100 chars 600 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 5.172 us 0.533 ms
|
||||
# 32 chars 25 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "800x600-75"
|
||||
# D: 49.50 MHz, H: 46.875 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
|
||||
timings 20203 160 16 21 1 80 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 800x600, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (56.25 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 800 600
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 53.674 kHz 85.061 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.138 us 0.056 ms
|
||||
# 8 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.569 us 0.019 ms
|
||||
# 4 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.702 us 0.503 ms
|
||||
# 19 chars 27 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 14.222 us 11.179 ms
|
||||
# 100 chars 600 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 4.409 us 0.578 ms
|
||||
# 31 chars 31 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "800x600-85"
|
||||
# D: 56.25 MHz, H: 53.674 kHz, V: 85.061 Hz
|
||||
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
|
||||
timings 17777 152 32 27 1 64 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 800x600, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (67.50 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 800 600
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 62.500 kHz 100.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 0.948 us 0.064 ms
|
||||
# 8 chars 4 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.000 us 0.112 ms
|
||||
# 0 chars 7 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 3.200 us 0.224 ms
|
||||
# 27 chars 14 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 11.852 us 9.600 ms
|
||||
# 100 chars 600 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 4.148 us 0.400 ms
|
||||
# 35 chars 25 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "800x600-100"
|
||||
# D: 67.50 MHz, H: 62.500 kHz, V: 100.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
|
||||
timings 14667 216 0 14 7 64 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 800x600, 120 Hz, Non-Interlaced (83.950 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 800 600
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 77.160 kHz 120.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.048 us 0.039 ms
|
||||
# 11 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.667 us 0.013 ms
|
||||
# 7 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.715 us 0.507 ms
|
||||
# 18 chars 39 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 9.529 us 7.776 ms
|
||||
# 100 chars 600 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.431 us 0.557 ms
|
||||
# 36 chars 43 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "800x600-120"
|
||||
# D: 83.950 MHz, H: 77.160 kHz, V: 120.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
|
||||
timings 11912 144 56 39 1 88 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 848x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.490 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 848 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 29.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.795 us 0.099 ms
|
||||
# 11 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.033 ms
|
||||
# 2 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 3.303 us 0.429 ms
|
||||
# 13 chars 13 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 26.929 us 16.097 ms
|
||||
# 106 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 6.605 us 0.570 ms
|
||||
# 26 chars 17 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "848x480-60"
|
||||
# D: 31.500 MHz, H: 29.830 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 848 480 848 480 32
|
||||
timings 31746 104 24 12 3 80 5 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 856x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.728 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 856 480
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 29.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.774 us 0.099 ms
|
||||
# 11 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.504 us 0.033 ms
|
||||
# 2 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 3.728 us 0.429 ms
|
||||
# 13 chars 13 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 26.979 us 16.097 ms
|
||||
# 107 chars 480 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 6.556 us 0.570 ms
|
||||
# 26 chars 17 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "856x480-60"
|
||||
# D: 31.728 MHz, H: 29.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 856 480 856 480 32
|
||||
timings 31518 104 16 13 1 88 3
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "960x600-60"
|
||||
# D: 45.250 MHz, H: 37.212 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 960 600 960 600 32 timings 22099 128 32 15 3 96 6 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1000x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (48.068 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1000 600
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 37.320 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.164 us 0.080 ms
|
||||
# 13 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.832 us 0.027 ms
|
||||
# 5 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.996 us 0.483 ms
|
||||
# 18 chars 18 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 20.804 us 16.077 ms
|
||||
# 125 chars 600 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 5.991 us 0.589 ms
|
||||
# 36 chars 22 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1000x600-60"
|
||||
# D: 48.068 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1000 600 1000 600 32
|
||||
timings 20834 144 40 18 1 104 3 endmode mode "1024x576-60"
|
||||
# D: 46.996 MHz, H: 35.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1024 576 1024 576 32
|
||||
timings 21278 144 40 17 1 104 3 endmode mode "1024x600-60"
|
||||
# D: 48.964 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1024 600 1024 600 32
|
||||
timings 20461 144 40 18 1 104 3 endmode mode "1088x612-60"
|
||||
# D: 52.952 MHz, H: 38.040 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1088 612 1088 612 32 timings 18877 152 48 16 3 104 5 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1024x512, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (41.291 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1024 512
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 31.860 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.519 us 0.094 ms
|
||||
# 13 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.775 us 0.031 ms
|
||||
# 4 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 3.294 us 0.465 ms
|
||||
# 17 chars 15 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 24.800 us 16.070 ms
|
||||
# 128 chars 512 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 6.587 us 0.596 ms
|
||||
# 34 chars 19 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1024x512-60"
|
||||
# D: 41.291 MHz, H: 31.860 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1024 512 1024 512 32
|
||||
timings 24218 126 32 15 1 104 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1024x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (48.875 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1024 768
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 37.252 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.128 us 80.532us
|
||||
# 13 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.818 us 26.844 us
|
||||
# 5 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.946 us 483.192 us
|
||||
# 18 chars 18 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 20.951 us 16.697 ms
|
||||
# 128 chars 622 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 5.893 us 0.591 ms
|
||||
# 36 chars 22 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
#mode "1024x600-60"
|
||||
# # D: 48.875 MHz, H: 37.252 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# geometry 1024 600 1024 600 32
|
||||
# timings 20460 144 40 18 1 104 3
|
||||
# endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1024x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (65.00 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1024 768
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 48.363 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 2.092 us 0.124 ms
|
||||
# 17 chars 6 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.369 us 0.062 ms
|
||||
# 3 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.462 us 0.601 ms
|
||||
# 20 chars 29 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 15.754 us 15.880 ms
|
||||
# 128 chars 768 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 4.923 us 0.786 ms
|
||||
# 40 chars 38 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative negative
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1024x768-60"
|
||||
# D: 65.00 MHz, H: 48.363 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32 timings 15385 160 24 29 3 136 6 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1024x768, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (78.75 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1024 768
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 60.023 kHz 75.03 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.219 us 0.050 ms
|
||||
# 12 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.203 us 0.017 ms
|
||||
# 2 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.235 us 0.466 ms
|
||||
# 22 chars 28 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 13.003 us 12.795 ms
|
||||
# 128 chars 768 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.657 us 0.533 ms
|
||||
# 36 chars 32 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1024x768-75"
|
||||
# D: 78.75 MHz, H: 60.023 kHz, V: 75.03 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
|
||||
timings 12699 176 16 28 1 96 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1024x768, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (94.50 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1024 768
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 68.677 kHz 85.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.016 us 0.044 ms
|
||||
# 12 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.015 ms
|
||||
# 6 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.201 us 0.524 ms
|
||||
# 26 chars 36 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 10.836 us 11.183 ms
|
||||
# 128 chars 768 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.725 us 0.582 ms
|
||||
# 44 chars 40 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1024x768-85"
|
||||
# D: 94.50 MHz, H: 68.677 kHz, V: 85.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
|
||||
timings 10582 208 48 36 1 96 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1024x768, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (110.0 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1024 768
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 79.023 kHz 99.78 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 0.800 us 0.101 ms
|
||||
# 11 chars 8 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.000 us 0.000 ms
|
||||
# 0 chars 0 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.545 us 0.202 ms
|
||||
# 35 chars 16 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 9.309 us 9.719 ms
|
||||
# 128 chars 768 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.345 us 0.304 ms
|
||||
# 46 chars 24 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative negative
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1024x768-100"
|
||||
# D: 113.3 MHz, H: 79.023 kHz, V: 99.78 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
|
||||
timings 8825 280 0 16 0 88 8 endmode mode "1152x720-60"
|
||||
# D: 66.750 MHz, H: 44.859 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1152 720 1152 720 32 timings 14981 168 56 19 3 112 6 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1152x864, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (110.0 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1152 864
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 75.137 kHz 74.99 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.309 us 0.106 ms
|
||||
# 18 chars 8 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.245 us 0.599 ms
|
||||
# 3 chars 45 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.282 us 1.132 ms
|
||||
# 18 chars 85 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 10.473 us 11.499 ms
|
||||
# 144 chars 864 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 2.836 us 1.837 ms
|
||||
# 39 chars 138 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1152x864-75"
|
||||
# D: 110.0 MHz, H: 75.137 kHz, V: 74.99 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1152 864 1152 864 32
|
||||
timings 9259 144 24 85 45 144 8
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1200x720-60"
|
||||
# D: 70.184 MHz, H: 44.760 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1200 720 1200 720 32
|
||||
timings 14253 184 28 22 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x600-60"
|
||||
# D: 61.503 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 600 1280 600 32
|
||||
timings 16260 184 28 18 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x720-50"
|
||||
# D: 60.466 MHz, H: 37.050 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 720 1280 720 32
|
||||
timings 16538 176 48 17 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x768-50"
|
||||
# D: 65.178 MHz, H: 39.550 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 768 1280 768 32 timings 15342 184 28 19 1 128 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1280x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (80.136 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1280 768
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 47.700 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.697 us 0.063 ms
|
||||
# 17 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.799 us 0.021 ms
|
||||
# 8 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.496 us 0.483 ms
|
||||
# 25 chars 23 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 15.973 us 16.101 ms
|
||||
# 160 chars 768 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 4.992 us 0.566 ms
|
||||
# 50 chars 27 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1280x768-60"
|
||||
# D: 80.13 MHz, H: 47.700 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 768 1280 768 32
|
||||
timings 12480 200 48 23 1 126 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1280x800, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (83.375 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1280 800
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 49.628 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.631 us 60.450 us
|
||||
# 17 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.768 us 20.15 us
|
||||
# 8 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.399 us 0.483 ms
|
||||
# 25 chars 24 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 15.352 us 16.120 ms
|
||||
# 160 chars 800 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 4.798 us 0.564 ms
|
||||
# 50 chars 28 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negtive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1280x800-60"
|
||||
# D: 83.500 MHz, H: 49.702 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 800 1280 800 32 timings 11994 200 72 22 3 128 6 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1280x960, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (108.00 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1280 960
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 60.000 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.050 ms
|
||||
# 14 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.889 us 0.017 ms
|
||||
# 12 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.889 us 0.600 ms
|
||||
# 39 chars 36 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 11.852 us 16.000 ms
|
||||
# 160 chars 960 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 4.815 us 0.667 ms
|
||||
# 65 chars 40 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1280x960-60"
|
||||
# D: 108.00 MHz, H: 60.000 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 960 1280 960 32
|
||||
timings 9259 312 96 36 1 112 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1280x1024, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (108.00 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1280 1024
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 63.981 kHz 60.02 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.047 ms
|
||||
# 14 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.444 us 0.015 ms
|
||||
# 6 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.297 us 0.594 ms
|
||||
# 31 chars 38 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 11.852 us 16.005 ms
|
||||
# 160 chars 1024 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.778 us 0.656 ms
|
||||
# 51 chars 42 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1280x1024-60"
|
||||
# D: 108.00 MHz, H: 63.981 kHz, V: 60.02 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
|
||||
timings 9260 248 48 38 1 112 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1280x1024, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (135.00 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1280 1024
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 79.976 kHz 75.02 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.067 us 0.038 ms
|
||||
# 18 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.119 us 0.012 ms
|
||||
# 2 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.837 us 0.475 ms
|
||||
# 31 chars 38 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 9.481 us 12.804 ms
|
||||
# 160 chars 1024 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.022 us 0.525 ms
|
||||
# 51 chars 42 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1280x1024-75"
|
||||
# D: 135.00 MHz, H: 79.976 kHz, V: 75.02 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
|
||||
timings 7408 248 16 38 1 144 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1280x1024, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (157.50 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1280 1024
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 91.146 kHz 85.02 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.016 us 0.033 ms
|
||||
# 20 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.406 us 0.011 ms
|
||||
# 8 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.422 us 0.483 ms
|
||||
# 28 chars 44 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 8.127 us 11.235 ms
|
||||
# 160 chars 1024 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 2.844 us 0.527 ms
|
||||
# 56 chars 48 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1280x1024-85"
|
||||
# D: 157.50 MHz, H: 91.146 kHz, V: 85.02 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
|
||||
timings 6349 224 64 44 1 160 3
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1440x900-60"
|
||||
# D: 106.500 MHz, H: 55.935 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1440 900 1440 900 32
|
||||
timings 9390 232 80 25 3 152 6
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1440x900-75"
|
||||
# D: 136.750 MHz, H: 70.635 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1440 900 1440 900 32
|
||||
timings 7315 248 96 33 3 152 6 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1440x1050, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (125.10 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1440 1050
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 65.220 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.204 us 0.046 ms
|
||||
# 19 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.760 us 0.015 ms
|
||||
# 12 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.964 us 0.495 ms
|
||||
# 31 chars 33 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 11.405 us 16.099 ms
|
||||
# 180 chars 1050 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.928 us 0.567 ms
|
||||
# 62 chars 37 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1440x1050-60"
|
||||
# D: 125.10 MHz, H: 65.220 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1440 1050 1440 1050 32
|
||||
timings 7993 248 96 33 1 152 3
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1600x900-60"
|
||||
# D: 118.250 MHz, H: 55.990 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1600 900 1600 900 32
|
||||
timings 8415 256 88 26 3 168 5 endmode mode "1600x1024-60"
|
||||
# D: 136.358 MHz, H: 63.600 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1600 1024 1600 1024 32 timings 7315 272 104 32 1 168 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1600x1200, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (156.00 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1600 1200
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 76.200 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.026 us 0.105 ms
|
||||
# 20 chars 8 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.205 us 0.131 ms
|
||||
# 4 chars 10 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.636 us 0.682 ms
|
||||
# 32 chars 52 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 10.256 us 15.748 ms
|
||||
# 200 chars 1200 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 2.872 us 0.866 ms
|
||||
# 56 chars 66 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative negative
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1600x1200-60"
|
||||
# D: 156.00 MHz, H: 76.200 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1600 1200 1600 1200 32 timings 6172 256 32 52 10 160 8 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1600x1200, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (202.50 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1600 1200
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 93.750 kHz 75.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 0.948 us 0.032 ms
|
||||
# 24 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.316 us 0.011 ms
|
||||
# 8 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.501 us 0.491 ms
|
||||
# 38 chars 46 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 7.901 us 12.800 ms
|
||||
# 200 chars 1200 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 2.765 us 0.533 ms
|
||||
# 70 chars 50 lines
|
||||
# Polarity positive positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1600x1200-75"
|
||||
# D: 202.50 MHz, H: 93.750 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1600 1200 1600 1200 32
|
||||
timings 4938 304 64 46 1 192 3
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1680x1050-60"
|
||||
# D: 146.250 MHz, H: 65.290 kHz, V: 59.954 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1680 1050 1680 1050 32
|
||||
timings 6814 280 104 30 3 176 6
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1680x1050-75"
|
||||
# D: 187.000 MHz, H: 82.306 kHz, V: 74.892 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1680 1050 1680 1050 32
|
||||
timings 5348 296 120 40 3 176 6
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1792x1344-60"
|
||||
# D: 202.975 MHz, H: 83.460 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1792 1344 1792 1344 32
|
||||
timings 4902 320 128 43 1 192 3
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1856x1392-60"
|
||||
# D: 218.571 MHz, H: 86.460 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1856 1392 1856 1392 32
|
||||
timings 4577 336 136 45 1 200 3
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1200-60"
|
||||
# D: 193.250 MHz, H: 74.556 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1920 1200 1920 1200 32
|
||||
timings 5173 336 136 36 3 200 6
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1440-60"
|
||||
# D: 234.000 MHz, H:90.000 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1920 1440 1920 1440 32
|
||||
timings 4274 344 128 56 1 208 3
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1440-75"
|
||||
# D: 297.000 MHz, H:112.500 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1920 1440 1920 1440 32
|
||||
timings 3367 352 144 56 1 224 3
|
||||
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "2048x1536-60"
|
||||
# D: 267.250 MHz, H: 95.446 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 2048 1536 2048 1536 32
|
||||
timings 3742 376 152 49 3 224 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1280x720, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (74.481 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1280 720
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 44.760 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.826 us 67.024 ms
|
||||
# 17 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.752 us 22.341 ms
|
||||
# 7 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.578 us 491.510 ms
|
||||
# 24 chars 22 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 17.186 us 16.086 ms
|
||||
# 160 chars 720 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 5.156 us 0.581 ms
|
||||
# 48 chars 26 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative negative
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1280x720-60"
|
||||
# D: 74.481 MHz, H: 44.760 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1280 720 1280 720 32 timings 13426 192 64 22 1 136 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1920x1080, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (172.798 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1920 1080
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 67.080 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.204 us 44.723 ms
|
||||
# 26 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.694 us 14.908 ms
|
||||
# 15 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.898 us 506.857 ms
|
||||
# 41 chars 34 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 11.111 us 16.100 ms
|
||||
# 240 chars 1080 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 3.796 us 0.566 ms
|
||||
# 82 chars 38 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative negative
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1920x1080-60"
|
||||
# D: 74.481 MHz, H: 67.080 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1920 1080 1920 1080 32 timings 5787 328 120 34 1 208 3 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1400x1050, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (122.61 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1400 1050
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 65.218 kHz 59.99 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.047 ms
|
||||
# 19 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.444 us 0.015 ms
|
||||
# 11 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 1.185 us 0.188 ms
|
||||
# 30 chars 33 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 12.963 us 16.411 ms
|
||||
# 175 chars 1050 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 2.667 us 0.250 ms
|
||||
# 60 chars 37 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1400x1050-60"
|
||||
# D: 122.750 MHz, H: 65.317 kHz, V: 59.99 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1400 1050 1408 1050 32
|
||||
timings 8214 232 88 32 3 144 4 endmode mode "1400x1050-75"
|
||||
# D: 156.000 MHz, H: 82.278 kHz, V: 74.867 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1400 1050 1408 1050 32 timings 6410 248 104 42 3 144 4 endmode
|
||||
#
|
||||
# 1366x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (85.86 MHz dotclock)
|
||||
#
|
||||
# Horizontal Vertical
|
||||
# Resolution 1366 768
|
||||
# Scan Frequency 47.700 kHz 60.00 Hz
|
||||
# Sync Width 1.677 us 0.063 ms
|
||||
# 18 chars 3 lines
|
||||
# Front Porch 0.839 us 0.021 ms
|
||||
# 9 chars 1 lines
|
||||
# Back Porch 2.516 us 0.482 ms
|
||||
# 27 chars 23 lines
|
||||
# Active Time 15.933 us 16.101 ms
|
||||
# 171 chars 768 lines
|
||||
# Blank Time 5.031 us 0.566 ms
|
||||
# 54 chars 27 lines
|
||||
# Polarity negative positive
|
||||
#
|
||||
mode "1360x768-60"
|
||||
# D: 84.750 MHz, H: 47.720 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1360 768 1360 768 32
|
||||
timings 11799 208 72 22 3 136 5 endmode mode "1366x768-60"
|
||||
# D: 85.86 MHz, H: 47.700 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1366 768 1366 768 32
|
||||
timings 11647 216 72 23 1 144 3 endmode mode "1366x768-50"
|
||||
# D: 69,924 MHz, H: 39.550 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
|
||||
geometry 1366 768 1366 768 32 timings 14301 200 56 19 1 144 3 endmode
|
214
Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
Normal file
214
Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
|
||||
|
||||
VIA Integration Graphic Chip Console Framebuffer Driver
|
||||
|
||||
[Platform]
|
||||
-----------------------
|
||||
The console framebuffer driver is for graphics chips of
|
||||
VIA UniChrome Family(CLE266, PM800 / CN400 / CN300,
|
||||
P4M800CE / P4M800Pro / CN700 / VN800,
|
||||
CX700 / VX700, K8M890, P4M890,
|
||||
CN896 / P4M900, VX800)
|
||||
|
||||
[Driver features]
|
||||
------------------------
|
||||
Device: CRT, LCD, DVI
|
||||
|
||||
Support viafb_mode:
|
||||
CRT:
|
||||
640x480(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz), 720x480(60 Hz),
|
||||
720x576(60 Hz), 800x600(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz),
|
||||
848x480(60 Hz), 856x480(60 Hz), 1024x512(60 Hz),
|
||||
1024x768(60, 75, 85, 100 Hz), 1152x864(75 Hz),
|
||||
1280x768(60 Hz), 1280x960(60 Hz), 1280x1024(60, 75, 85 Hz),
|
||||
1440x1050(60 Hz), 1600x1200(60, 75 Hz), 1280x720(60 Hz),
|
||||
1920x1080(60 Hz), 1400x1050(60 Hz), 800x480(60 Hz)
|
||||
|
||||
color depth: 8 bpp, 16 bpp, 32 bpp supports.
|
||||
|
||||
Support 2D hardware accelerator.
|
||||
|
||||
[Using the viafb module]
|
||||
-- -- --------------------
|
||||
Start viafb with default settings:
|
||||
#modprobe viafb
|
||||
|
||||
Start viafb with with user options:
|
||||
#modprobe viafb viafb_mode=800x600 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh=60
|
||||
viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_dvi_port=DVP1
|
||||
viafb_mode1=1024x768 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh1=60
|
||||
viafb_SAMM_ON=1
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_mode:
|
||||
640x480 (default)
|
||||
720x480
|
||||
800x600
|
||||
1024x768
|
||||
......
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_bpp:
|
||||
8, 16, 32 (default:32)
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_refresh:
|
||||
60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_lcd_dsp_method:
|
||||
0 : expansion (default)
|
||||
1 : centering
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_lcd_mode:
|
||||
0 : LCD panel with LSB data format input (default)
|
||||
1 : LCD panel with MSB data format input
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_lcd_panel_id:
|
||||
0 : Resolution: 640x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
1 : Resolution: 800x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
2 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable (default)
|
||||
3 : Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
4 : Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
5 : Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
6 : Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
|
||||
8 : Resolution: 800x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
9 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
10: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
|
||||
11: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
|
||||
12: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
|
||||
13: Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
|
||||
14: Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
|
||||
15: Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
|
||||
16: Resolution: 1366x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
|
||||
17: Resolution: 1024x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
18: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
19: Resolution: 1280x800, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_accel:
|
||||
0 : No 2D Hardware Acceleration
|
||||
1 : 2D Hardware Acceleration (default)
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_SAMM_ON:
|
||||
0 : viafb_SAMM_ON disable (default)
|
||||
1 : viafb_SAMM_ON enable
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_mode1: (secondary display device)
|
||||
640x480 (default)
|
||||
720x480
|
||||
800x600
|
||||
1024x768
|
||||
... ...
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_bpp1: (secondary display device)
|
||||
8, 16, 32 (default:32)
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_refresh1: (secondary display device)
|
||||
60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_active_dev:
|
||||
This option is used to specify active devices.(CRT, DVI, CRT+LCD...)
|
||||
DVI stands for DVI or HDMI, E.g., If you want to enable HDMI,
|
||||
set viafb_active_dev=DVI. In SAMM case, the previous of
|
||||
viafb_active_dev is primary device, and the following is
|
||||
secondary device.
|
||||
|
||||
For example:
|
||||
To enable one device, such as DVI only, we can use:
|
||||
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI
|
||||
To enable two devices, such as CRT+DVI:
|
||||
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI;
|
||||
|
||||
For DuoView case, we can use:
|
||||
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI
|
||||
OR
|
||||
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT...
|
||||
|
||||
For SAMM case:
|
||||
If CRT is primary and DVI is secondary, we should use:
|
||||
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
|
||||
If DVI is primary and CRT is secondary, we should use:
|
||||
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_display_hardware_layout:
|
||||
This option is used to specify display hardware layout for CX700 chip.
|
||||
1 : LCD only
|
||||
2 : DVI only
|
||||
3 : LCD+DVI (default)
|
||||
4 : LCD1+LCD2 (internal + internal)
|
||||
16: LCD1+ExternalLCD2 (internal + external)
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_second_size:
|
||||
This option is used to set second device memory size(MB) in SAMM case.
|
||||
The minimal size is 16.
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_platform_epia_dvi:
|
||||
This option is used to enable DVI on EPIA - M
|
||||
0 : No DVI on EPIA - M (default)
|
||||
1 : DVI on EPIA - M
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_bus_width:
|
||||
When using 24 - Bit Bus Width Digital Interface,
|
||||
this option should be set.
|
||||
12: 12-Bit LVDS or 12-Bit TMDS (default)
|
||||
24: 24-Bit LVDS or 24-Bit TMDS
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_device_lcd_dualedge:
|
||||
When using Dual Edge Panel, this option should be set.
|
||||
0 : No Dual Edge Panel (default)
|
||||
1 : Dual Edge Panel
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_video_dev:
|
||||
This option is used to specify video output devices(CRT, DVI, LCD) for
|
||||
duoview case.
|
||||
For example:
|
||||
To output video on DVI, we should use:
|
||||
modprobe viafb viafb_video_dev=DVI...
|
||||
|
||||
viafb_lcd_port:
|
||||
This option is used to specify LCD output port,
|
||||
available values are "DVP0" "DVP1" "DFP_HIGHLOW" "DFP_HIGH" "DFP_LOW".
|
||||
for external LCD + external DVI on CX700(External LCD is on DVP0),
|
||||
we should use:
|
||||
modprobe viafb viafb_lcd_port=DVP0...
|
||||
|
||||
Notes:
|
||||
1. CRT may not display properly for DuoView CRT & DVI display at
|
||||
the "640x480" PAL mode with DVI overscan enabled.
|
||||
2. SAMM stands for single adapter multi monitors. It is different from
|
||||
multi-head since SAMM support multi monitor at driver layers, thus fbcon
|
||||
layer doesn't even know about it; SAMM's second screen doesn't have a
|
||||
device node file, thus a user mode application can't access it directly.
|
||||
When SAMM is enabled, viafb_mode and viafb_mode1, viafb_bpp and
|
||||
viafb_bpp1, viafb_refresh and viafb_refresh1 can be different.
|
||||
3. When console is depending on viafbinfo1, dynamically change resolution
|
||||
and bpp, need to call VIAFB specified ioctl interface VIAFB_SET_DEVICE
|
||||
instead of calling common ioctl function FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO since
|
||||
viafb doesn't support multi-head well, or it will cause screen crush.
|
||||
4. VX800 2D accelerator hasn't been supported in this driver yet. When
|
||||
using driver on VX800, the driver will disable the acceleration
|
||||
function as default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
[Configure viafb with "fbset" tool]
|
||||
-----------------------------------
|
||||
"fbset" is an inbox utility of Linux.
|
||||
1. Inquire current viafb information, type,
|
||||
# fbset -i
|
||||
|
||||
2. Set various resolutions and viafb_refresh rates,
|
||||
# fbset <resolution-vertical_sync>
|
||||
|
||||
example,
|
||||
# fbset "1024x768-75"
|
||||
or
|
||||
# fbset -g 1024 768 1024 768 32
|
||||
Check the file "/etc/fb.modes" to find display modes available.
|
||||
|
||||
3. Set the color depth,
|
||||
# fbset -depth <value>
|
||||
|
||||
example,
|
||||
# fbset -depth 16
|
||||
|
||||
[Bootup with viafb]:
|
||||
--------------------
|
||||
Add the following line to your grub.conf:
|
||||
append = "video=viafb:viafb_mode=1024x768,viafb_bpp=32,viafb_refresh=85"
|
||||
|
@ -287,6 +287,22 @@ Who: Glauber Costa <gcosta@redhat.com>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: remove HID compat support
|
||||
When: 2.6.29
|
||||
Why: needed only as a temporary solution until distros fix themselves up
|
||||
Who: Jiri Slaby <jirislaby@gmail.com>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: print_fn_descriptor_symbol()
|
||||
When: October 2009
|
||||
Why: The %pF vsprintf format provides the same functionality in a
|
||||
simpler way. print_fn_descriptor_symbol() is deprecated but
|
||||
still present to give out-of-tree modules time to change.
|
||||
Who: Bjorn Helgaas <bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/o2cb symlink
|
||||
When: January 2010
|
||||
Why: /sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb
|
||||
|
393
Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt
Normal file
393
Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
|
||||
|
||||
Miscellaneous Device control operations for the autofs4 kernel module
|
||||
====================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
The problem
|
||||
===========
|
||||
|
||||
There is a problem with active restarts in autofs (that is to say
|
||||
restarting autofs when there are busy mounts).
|
||||
|
||||
During normal operation autofs uses a file descriptor opened on the
|
||||
directory that is being managed in order to be able to issue control
|
||||
operations. Using a file descriptor gives ioctl operations access to
|
||||
autofs specific information stored in the super block. The operations
|
||||
are things such as setting an autofs mount catatonic, setting the
|
||||
expire timeout and requesting expire checks. As is explained below,
|
||||
certain types of autofs triggered mounts can end up covering an autofs
|
||||
mount itself which prevents us being able to use open(2) to obtain a
|
||||
file descriptor for these operations if we don't already have one open.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently autofs uses "umount -l" (lazy umount) to clear active mounts
|
||||
at restart. While using lazy umount works for most cases, anything that
|
||||
needs to walk back up the mount tree to construct a path, such as
|
||||
getcwd(2) and the proc file system /proc/<pid>/cwd, no longer works
|
||||
because the point from which the path is constructed has been detached
|
||||
from the mount tree.
|
||||
|
||||
The actual problem with autofs is that it can't reconnect to existing
|
||||
mounts. Immediately one thinks of just adding the ability to remount
|
||||
autofs file systems would solve it, but alas, that can't work. This is
|
||||
because autofs direct mounts and the implementation of "on demand mount
|
||||
and expire" of nested mount trees have the file system mounted directly
|
||||
on top of the mount trigger directory dentry.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, there are two types of automount maps, direct (in the kernel
|
||||
module source you will see a third type called an offset, which is just
|
||||
a direct mount in disguise) and indirect.
|
||||
|
||||
Here is a master map with direct and indirect map entries:
|
||||
|
||||
/- /etc/auto.direct
|
||||
/test /etc/auto.indirect
|
||||
|
||||
and the corresponding map files:
|
||||
|
||||
/etc/auto.direct:
|
||||
|
||||
/automount/dparse/g6 budgie:/autofs/export1
|
||||
/automount/dparse/g1 shark:/autofs/export1
|
||||
and so on.
|
||||
|
||||
/etc/auto.indirect:
|
||||
|
||||
g1 shark:/autofs/export1
|
||||
g6 budgie:/autofs/export1
|
||||
and so on.
|
||||
|
||||
For the above indirect map an autofs file system is mounted on /test and
|
||||
mounts are triggered for each sub-directory key by the inode lookup
|
||||
operation. So we see a mount of shark:/autofs/export1 on /test/g1, for
|
||||
example.
|
||||
|
||||
The way that direct mounts are handled is by making an autofs mount on
|
||||
each full path, such as /automount/dparse/g1, and using it as a mount
|
||||
trigger. So when we walk on the path we mount shark:/autofs/export1 "on
|
||||
top of this mount point". Since these are always directories we can
|
||||
use the follow_link inode operation to trigger the mount.
|
||||
|
||||
But, each entry in direct and indirect maps can have offsets (making
|
||||
them multi-mount map entries).
|
||||
|
||||
For example, an indirect mount map entry could also be:
|
||||
|
||||
g1 \
|
||||
/ shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \
|
||||
/s1 shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \
|
||||
/s2 shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \
|
||||
/s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export1 \
|
||||
/s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2
|
||||
|
||||
and a similarly a direct mount map entry could also be:
|
||||
|
||||
/automount/dparse/g1 \
|
||||
/ shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \
|
||||
/s1 shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \
|
||||
/s2 shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \
|
||||
/s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export2 \
|
||||
/s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2
|
||||
|
||||
One of the issues with version 4 of autofs was that, when mounting an
|
||||
entry with a large number of offsets, possibly with nesting, we needed
|
||||
to mount and umount all of the offsets as a single unit. Not really a
|
||||
problem, except for people with a large number of offsets in map entries.
|
||||
This mechanism is used for the well known "hosts" map and we have seen
|
||||
cases (in 2.4) where the available number of mounts are exhausted or
|
||||
where the number of privileged ports available is exhausted.
|
||||
|
||||
In version 5 we mount only as we go down the tree of offsets and
|
||||
similarly for expiring them which resolves the above problem. There is
|
||||
somewhat more detail to the implementation but it isn't needed for the
|
||||
sake of the problem explanation. The one important detail is that these
|
||||
offsets are implemented using the same mechanism as the direct mounts
|
||||
above and so the mount points can be covered by a mount.
|
||||
|
||||
The current autofs implementation uses an ioctl file descriptor opened
|
||||
on the mount point for control operations. The references held by the
|
||||
descriptor are accounted for in checks made to determine if a mount is
|
||||
in use and is also used to access autofs file system information held
|
||||
in the mount super block. So the use of a file handle needs to be
|
||||
retained.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The Solution
|
||||
============
|
||||
|
||||
To be able to restart autofs leaving existing direct, indirect and
|
||||
offset mounts in place we need to be able to obtain a file handle
|
||||
for these potentially covered autofs mount points. Rather than just
|
||||
implement an isolated operation it was decided to re-implement the
|
||||
existing ioctl interface and add new operations to provide this
|
||||
functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
In addition, to be able to reconstruct a mount tree that has busy mounts,
|
||||
the uid and gid of the last user that triggered the mount needs to be
|
||||
available because these can be used as macro substitution variables in
|
||||
autofs maps. They are recorded at mount request time and an operation
|
||||
has been added to retrieve them.
|
||||
|
||||
Since we're re-implementing the control interface, a couple of other
|
||||
problems with the existing interface have been addressed. First, when
|
||||
a mount or expire operation completes a status is returned to the
|
||||
kernel by either a "send ready" or a "send fail" operation. The
|
||||
"send fail" operation of the ioctl interface could only ever send
|
||||
ENOENT so the re-implementation allows user space to send an actual
|
||||
status. Another expensive operation in user space, for those using
|
||||
very large maps, is discovering if a mount is present. Usually this
|
||||
involves scanning /proc/mounts and since it needs to be done quite
|
||||
often it can introduce significant overhead when there are many entries
|
||||
in the mount table. An operation to lookup the mount status of a mount
|
||||
point dentry (covered or not) has also been added.
|
||||
|
||||
Current kernel development policy recommends avoiding the use of the
|
||||
ioctl mechanism in favor of systems such as Netlink. An implementation
|
||||
using this system was attempted to evaluate its suitability and it was
|
||||
found to be inadequate, in this case. The Generic Netlink system was
|
||||
used for this as raw Netlink would lead to a significant increase in
|
||||
complexity. There's no question that the Generic Netlink system is an
|
||||
elegant solution for common case ioctl functions but it's not a complete
|
||||
replacement probably because it's primary purpose in life is to be a
|
||||
message bus implementation rather than specifically an ioctl replacement.
|
||||
While it would be possible to work around this there is one concern
|
||||
that lead to the decision to not use it. This is that the autofs
|
||||
expire in the daemon has become far to complex because umount
|
||||
candidates are enumerated, almost for no other reason than to "count"
|
||||
the number of times to call the expire ioctl. This involves scanning
|
||||
the mount table which has proved to be a big overhead for users with
|
||||
large maps. The best way to improve this is try and get back to the
|
||||
way the expire was done long ago. That is, when an expire request is
|
||||
issued for a mount (file handle) we should continually call back to
|
||||
the daemon until we can't umount any more mounts, then return the
|
||||
appropriate status to the daemon. At the moment we just expire one
|
||||
mount at a time. A Generic Netlink implementation would exclude this
|
||||
possibility for future development due to the requirements of the
|
||||
message bus architecture.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
autofs4 Miscellaneous Device mount control interface
|
||||
====================================================
|
||||
|
||||
The control interface is opening a device node, typically /dev/autofs.
|
||||
|
||||
All the ioctls use a common structure to pass the needed parameter
|
||||
information and return operation results:
|
||||
|
||||
struct autofs_dev_ioctl {
|
||||
__u32 ver_major;
|
||||
__u32 ver_minor;
|
||||
__u32 size; /* total size of data passed in
|
||||
* including this struct */
|
||||
__s32 ioctlfd; /* automount command fd */
|
||||
|
||||
__u32 arg1; /* Command parameters */
|
||||
__u32 arg2;
|
||||
|
||||
char path[0];
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
The ioctlfd field is a mount point file descriptor of an autofs mount
|
||||
point. It is returned by the open call and is used by all calls except
|
||||
the check for whether a given path is a mount point, where it may
|
||||
optionally be used to check a specific mount corresponding to a given
|
||||
mount point file descriptor, and when requesting the uid and gid of the
|
||||
last successful mount on a directory within the autofs file system.
|
||||
|
||||
The fields arg1 and arg2 are used to communicate parameters and results of
|
||||
calls made as described below.
|
||||
|
||||
The path field is used to pass a path where it is needed and the size field
|
||||
is used account for the increased structure length when translating the
|
||||
structure sent from user space.
|
||||
|
||||
This structure can be initialized before setting specific fields by using
|
||||
the void function call init_autofs_dev_ioctl(struct autofs_dev_ioctl *).
|
||||
|
||||
All of the ioctls perform a copy of this structure from user space to
|
||||
kernel space and return -EINVAL if the size parameter is smaller than
|
||||
the structure size itself, -ENOMEM if the kernel memory allocation fails
|
||||
or -EFAULT if the copy itself fails. Other checks include a version check
|
||||
of the compiled in user space version against the module version and a
|
||||
mismatch results in a -EINVAL return. If the size field is greater than
|
||||
the structure size then a path is assumed to be present and is checked to
|
||||
ensure it begins with a "/" and is NULL terminated, otherwise -EINVAL is
|
||||
returned. Following these checks, for all ioctl commands except
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION_CMD, AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT_CMD and
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT_CMD the ioctlfd is validated and if it is
|
||||
not a valid descriptor or doesn't correspond to an autofs mount point
|
||||
an error of -EBADF, -ENOTTY or -EINVAL (not an autofs descriptor) is
|
||||
returned.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The ioctls
|
||||
==========
|
||||
|
||||
An example of an implementation which uses this interface can be seen
|
||||
in autofs version 5.0.4 and later in file lib/dev-ioctl-lib.c of the
|
||||
distribution tar available for download from kernel.org in directory
|
||||
/pub/linux/daemons/autofs/v5.
|
||||
|
||||
The device node ioctl operations implemented by this interface are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION
|
||||
------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Get the major and minor version of the autofs4 device ioctl kernel module
|
||||
implementation. It requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl as an
|
||||
input parameter and sets the version information in the passed in structure.
|
||||
It returns 0 on success or the error -EINVAL if a version mismatch is
|
||||
detected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOVER_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOSUBVER_CMD
|
||||
------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Get the major and minor version of the autofs4 protocol version understood
|
||||
by loaded module. This call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl
|
||||
with the ioctlfd field set to a valid autofs mount point descriptor
|
||||
and sets the requested version number in structure field arg1. These
|
||||
commands return 0 on success or one of the negative error codes if
|
||||
validation fails.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT
|
||||
----------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Obtain and release a file descriptor for an autofs managed mount point
|
||||
path. The open call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with
|
||||
the the path field set and the size field adjusted appropriately as well
|
||||
as the arg1 field set to the device number of the autofs mount. The
|
||||
device number can be obtained from the mount options shown in
|
||||
/proc/mounts. The close call requires an initialized struct
|
||||
autofs_dev_ioct with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained
|
||||
from the open call. The release of the file descriptor can also be done
|
||||
with close(2) so any open descriptors will also be closed at process exit.
|
||||
The close call is included in the implemented operations largely for
|
||||
completeness and to provide for a consistent user space implementation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_READY_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_FAIL_CMD
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Return mount and expire result status from user space to the kernel.
|
||||
Both of these calls require an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl
|
||||
with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open
|
||||
call and the arg1 field set to the wait queue token number, received
|
||||
by user space in the foregoing mount or expire request. The arg2 field
|
||||
is set to the status to be returned. For the ready call this is always
|
||||
0 and for the fail call it is set to the errno of the operation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_SETPIPEFD_CMD
|
||||
------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Set the pipe file descriptor used for kernel communication to the daemon.
|
||||
Normally this is set at mount time using an option but when reconnecting
|
||||
to a existing mount we need to use this to tell the autofs mount about
|
||||
the new kernel pipe descriptor. In order to protect mounts against
|
||||
incorrectly setting the pipe descriptor we also require that the autofs
|
||||
mount be catatonic (see next call).
|
||||
|
||||
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
|
||||
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and
|
||||
the arg1 field set to descriptor of the pipe. On success the call
|
||||
also sets the process group id used to identify the controlling process
|
||||
(eg. the owning automount(8) daemon) to the process group of the caller.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CATATONIC_CMD
|
||||
------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Make the autofs mount point catatonic. The autofs mount will no longer
|
||||
issue mount requests, the kernel communication pipe descriptor is released
|
||||
and any remaining waits in the queue released.
|
||||
|
||||
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
|
||||
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_TIMEOUT_CMD
|
||||
----------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Set the expire timeout for mounts withing an autofs mount point.
|
||||
|
||||
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
|
||||
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_REQUESTER_CMD
|
||||
------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Return the uid and gid of the last process to successfully trigger a the
|
||||
mount on the given path dentry.
|
||||
|
||||
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the path
|
||||
field set to the mount point in question and the size field adjusted
|
||||
appropriately as well as the arg1 field set to the device number of the
|
||||
containing autofs mount. Upon return the struct field arg1 contains the
|
||||
uid and arg2 the gid.
|
||||
|
||||
When reconstructing an autofs mount tree with active mounts we need to
|
||||
re-connect to mounts that may have used the original process uid and
|
||||
gid (or string variations of them) for mount lookups within the map entry.
|
||||
This call provides the ability to obtain this uid and gid so they may be
|
||||
used by user space for the mount map lookups.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_EXPIRE_CMD
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Issue an expire request to the kernel for an autofs mount. Typically
|
||||
this ioctl is called until no further expire candidates are found.
|
||||
|
||||
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
|
||||
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. In
|
||||
addition an immediate expire, independent of the mount timeout, can be
|
||||
requested by setting the arg1 field to 1. If no expire candidates can
|
||||
be found the ioctl returns -1 with errno set to EAGAIN.
|
||||
|
||||
This call causes the kernel module to check the mount corresponding
|
||||
to the given ioctlfd for mounts that can be expired, issues an expire
|
||||
request back to the daemon and waits for completion.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ASKUMOUNT_CMD
|
||||
------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Checks if an autofs mount point is in use.
|
||||
|
||||
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
|
||||
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and
|
||||
it returns the result in the arg1 field, 1 for busy and 0 otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ISMOUNTPOINT_CMD
|
||||
---------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Check if the given path is a mountpoint.
|
||||
|
||||
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl. There are two
|
||||
possible variations. Both use the path field set to the path of the mount
|
||||
point to check and the size field adjusted appropriately. One uses the
|
||||
ioctlfd field to identify a specific mount point to check while the other
|
||||
variation uses the path and optionaly arg1 set to an autofs mount type.
|
||||
The call returns 1 if this is a mount point and sets arg1 to the device
|
||||
number of the mount and field arg2 to the relevant super block magic
|
||||
number (described below) or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint. In both cases
|
||||
the the device number (as returned by new_encode_dev()) is returned
|
||||
in field arg1.
|
||||
|
||||
If supplied with a file descriptor we're looking for a specific mount,
|
||||
not necessarily at the top of the mounted stack. In this case the path
|
||||
the descriptor corresponds to is considered a mountpoint if it is itself
|
||||
a mountpoint or contains a mount, such as a multi-mount without a root
|
||||
mount. In this case we return 1 if the descriptor corresponds to a mount
|
||||
point and and also returns the super magic of the covering mount if there
|
||||
is one or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint.
|
||||
|
||||
If a path is supplied (and the ioctlfd field is set to -1) then the path
|
||||
is looked up and is checked to see if it is the root of a mount. If a
|
||||
type is also given we are looking for a particular autofs mount and if
|
||||
a match isn't found a fail is returned. If the the located path is the
|
||||
root of a mount 1 is returned along with the super magic of the mount
|
||||
or 0 otherwise.
|
||||
|
@ -193,6 +193,5 @@ kernel source: <file:fs/ext3/>
|
||||
programs: http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/
|
||||
http://ext2resize.sourceforge.net
|
||||
|
||||
useful links: http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/ext3/ext3-usage.html
|
||||
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/
|
||||
useful links: http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/
|
||||
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs8/
|
||||
|
@ -2,19 +2,24 @@
|
||||
Ext4 Filesystem
|
||||
===============
|
||||
|
||||
This is a development version of the ext4 filesystem, an advanced level
|
||||
of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates scalability and reliability
|
||||
enhancements for supporting large filesystems (64 bit) in keeping with
|
||||
increasing disk capacities and state-of-the-art feature requirements.
|
||||
Ext4 is an an advanced level of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates
|
||||
scalability and reliability enhancements for supporting large filesystems
|
||||
(64 bit) in keeping with increasing disk capacities and state-of-the-art
|
||||
feature requirements.
|
||||
|
||||
Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
Web site: http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1. Quick usage instructions:
|
||||
===========================
|
||||
|
||||
Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be
|
||||
found at the ext4 wiki site at the URL:
|
||||
http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Ext4_Howto
|
||||
|
||||
- Compile and install the latest version of e2fsprogs (as of this
|
||||
writing version 1.41) from:
|
||||
writing version 1.41.3) from:
|
||||
|
||||
http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=2406
|
||||
|
||||
@ -36,11 +41,9 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
|
||||
# mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1
|
||||
|
||||
Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set
|
||||
the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development
|
||||
filesystem to touch this filesystem:
|
||||
Or to configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents:
|
||||
|
||||
# tune2fs -O extents -E test_fs /dev/hda1
|
||||
# tune2fs -O extents /dev/hda1
|
||||
|
||||
If the filesystem was created with 128 byte inodes, it can be
|
||||
converted to use 256 byte for greater efficiency via:
|
||||
@ -104,8 +107,8 @@ exist yet so I'm not sure they're in the near-term roadmap.
|
||||
The big performance win will come with mballoc, delalloc and flex_bg
|
||||
grouping of bitmaps and inode tables. Some test results available here:
|
||||
|
||||
- http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080530/ffsb-write-2.6.26-rc2.html
|
||||
- http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080530/ffsb-readwrite-2.6.26-rc2.html
|
||||
- http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080818-ffsb/ffsb-write-2.6.27-rc1.html
|
||||
- http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080818-ffsb/ffsb-readwrite-2.6.27-rc1.html
|
||||
|
||||
3. Options
|
||||
==========
|
||||
@ -214,9 +217,6 @@ noreservation
|
||||
bsddf (*) Make 'df' act like BSD.
|
||||
minixdf Make 'df' act like Minix.
|
||||
|
||||
check=none Don't do extra checking of bitmaps on mount.
|
||||
nocheck
|
||||
|
||||
debug Extra debugging information is sent to syslog.
|
||||
|
||||
errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
|
||||
@ -253,8 +253,6 @@ nobh (a) cache disk block mapping information
|
||||
"nobh" option tries to avoid associating buffer
|
||||
heads (supported only for "writeback" mode).
|
||||
|
||||
mballoc (*) Use the multiple block allocator for block allocation
|
||||
nomballoc disabled multiple block allocator for block allocation.
|
||||
stripe=n Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try
|
||||
to use for allocation size and alignment. For RAID5/6
|
||||
systems this should be the number of data
|
||||
|
@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ They depend on various facilities being available:
|
||||
3.1) Booting from a floppy using syslinux
|
||||
|
||||
When building kernels, an easy way to create a boot floppy that uses
|
||||
syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use
|
||||
syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use zimage
|
||||
and bzimage images respectively. Both targets accept the
|
||||
FDARGS parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -76,3 +76,9 @@ localalloc=8(*) Allows custom localalloc size in MB. If the value is too
|
||||
large, the fs will silently revert it to the default.
|
||||
Localalloc is not enabled for local mounts.
|
||||
localflocks This disables cluster aware flock.
|
||||
inode64 Indicates that Ocfs2 is allowed to create inodes at
|
||||
any location in the filesystem, including those which
|
||||
will result in inode numbers occupying more than 32
|
||||
bits of significance.
|
||||
user_xattr (*) Enables Extended User Attributes.
|
||||
nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes.
|
||||
|
@ -1321,6 +1321,18 @@ debugging information is displayed on console.
|
||||
NMI switch that most IA32 servers have fires unknown NMI up, for example.
|
||||
If a system hangs up, try pressing the NMI switch.
|
||||
|
||||
panic_on_unrecovered_nmi
|
||||
------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
The default Linux behaviour on an NMI of either memory or unknown is to continue
|
||||
operation. For many environments such as scientific computing it is preferable
|
||||
that the box is taken out and the error dealt with than an uncorrected
|
||||
parity/ECC error get propogated.
|
||||
|
||||
A small number of systems do generate NMI's for bizarre random reasons such as
|
||||
power management so the default is off. That sysctl works like the existing
|
||||
panic controls already in that directory.
|
||||
|
||||
nmi_watchdog
|
||||
------------
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1331,13 +1343,6 @@ determine whether or not they are still functioning properly.
|
||||
Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI
|
||||
watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize.
|
||||
|
||||
maps_protect
|
||||
------------
|
||||
|
||||
Enables/Disables the protection of the per-process proc entries "maps" and
|
||||
"smaps". When enabled, the contents of these files are visible only to
|
||||
readers that are allowed to ptrace() the given process.
|
||||
|
||||
msgmni
|
||||
------
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ User Mode Linux, like so:
|
||||
sleep(999999999);
|
||||
}
|
||||
EOF
|
||||
gcc -static hello2.c -o init
|
||||
gcc -static hello.c -o init
|
||||
echo init | cpio -o -H newc | gzip > test.cpio.gz
|
||||
# Testing external initramfs using the initrd loading mechanism.
|
||||
qemu -kernel /boot/vmlinuz -initrd test.cpio.gz /dev/zero
|
||||
|
@ -240,6 +240,10 @@ signal, or (b) something wrongly believes it's safe to remove drivers
|
||||
needed to manage a signal that's in active use. That is, requesting a
|
||||
GPIO can serve as a kind of lock.
|
||||
|
||||
Some platforms may also use knowledge about what GPIOs are active for
|
||||
power management, such as by powering down unused chip sectors and, more
|
||||
easily, gating off unused clocks.
|
||||
|
||||
These two calls are optional because not not all current Linux platforms
|
||||
offer such functionality in their GPIO support; a valid implementation
|
||||
could return success for all gpio_request() calls. Unlike the other calls,
|
||||
@ -264,7 +268,7 @@ map between them using calls like:
|
||||
/* map GPIO numbers to IRQ numbers */
|
||||
int gpio_to_irq(unsigned gpio);
|
||||
|
||||
/* map IRQ numbers to GPIO numbers */
|
||||
/* map IRQ numbers to GPIO numbers (avoid using this) */
|
||||
int irq_to_gpio(unsigned irq);
|
||||
|
||||
Those return either the corresponding number in the other namespace, or
|
||||
@ -284,7 +288,8 @@ system wakeup capabilities.
|
||||
|
||||
Non-error values returned from irq_to_gpio() would most commonly be used
|
||||
with gpio_get_value(), for example to initialize or update driver state
|
||||
when the IRQ is edge-triggered.
|
||||
when the IRQ is edge-triggered. Note that some platforms don't support
|
||||
this reverse mapping, so you should avoid using it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Emulating Open Drain Signals
|
||||
|
76
Documentation/hwmon/adt7470
Normal file
76
Documentation/hwmon/adt7470
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
|
||||
Kernel driver adt7470
|
||||
=====================
|
||||
|
||||
Supported chips:
|
||||
* Analog Devices ADT7470
|
||||
Prefix: 'adt7470'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2C, 0x2E, 0x2F
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
|
||||
|
||||
Author: Darrick J. Wong
|
||||
|
||||
Description
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADT7470 chip. There may
|
||||
be other chips that implement this interface.
|
||||
|
||||
The ADT7470 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBus 2.0
|
||||
specification. Using an analog to digital converter it measures up to ten (10)
|
||||
external temperatures. It has four (4) 16-bit counters for measuring fan speed.
|
||||
There are four (4) PWM outputs that can be used to control fan speed.
|
||||
|
||||
A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the ADT7470
|
||||
that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the ten
|
||||
temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and
|
||||
programmable. Once configured, the ADT7470 will adjust the PWM outputs in
|
||||
response to the measured temperatures with further host intervention. This
|
||||
feature can also be disabled for manual control of the PWM's.
|
||||
|
||||
Each of the measured inputs (temperature, fan speed) has corresponding high/low
|
||||
limit values. The ADT7470 will signal an ALARM if any measured value exceeds
|
||||
either limit.
|
||||
|
||||
The ADT7470 DOES NOT sample all inputs continuously. A single pin on the
|
||||
ADT7470 is connected to a multitude of thermal diodes, but the chip must be
|
||||
instructed explicitly to read the multitude of diodes. If you want to use
|
||||
automatic fan control mode, you must manually read any of the temperature
|
||||
sensors or the fan control algorithm will not run. The chip WILL NOT DO THIS
|
||||
AUTOMATICALLY; this must be done from userspace. This may be a bug in the chip
|
||||
design, given that many other AD chips take care of this. The driver will not
|
||||
read the registers more often than once every 5 seconds. Further,
|
||||
configuration data is only read once per minute.
|
||||
|
||||
Special Features
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
|
||||
The ADT7470 has a 8-bit ADC and is capable of measuring temperatures with 1
|
||||
degC resolution.
|
||||
|
||||
The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for
|
||||
determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control.
|
||||
|
||||
Configuration Notes
|
||||
-------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following:
|
||||
|
||||
* PWM Control
|
||||
|
||||
* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and pwm#_auto_point1_temp and
|
||||
* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and pwm#_auto_point2_temp -
|
||||
|
||||
point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound.
|
||||
point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound.
|
||||
|
||||
The ADT7470 will scale the pwm between the lower and higher pwm speed when
|
||||
the temperature is between the two temperature boundaries. PWM values range
|
||||
from 0 (off) to 255 (full speed). Fan speed will be set to maximum when the
|
||||
temperature sensor associated with the PWM control exceeds
|
||||
pwm#_auto_point2_temp.
|
||||
|
||||
Notes
|
||||
-----
|
||||
|
||||
As stated above, the temperature inputs must be read periodically from
|
||||
userspace in order for the automatic pwm algorithm to run.
|
@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ once-only alarms.
|
||||
The IT87xx only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
|
||||
will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
|
||||
|
||||
To change sensor N to a thermistor, 'echo 2 > tempN_type' where N is 1, 2,
|
||||
To change sensor N to a thermistor, 'echo 4 > tempN_type' where N is 1, 2,
|
||||
or 3. To change sensor N to a thermal diode, 'echo 3 > tempN_type'.
|
||||
Give 0 for unused sensor. Any other value is invalid. To configure this at
|
||||
startup, consult lm_sensors's /etc/sensors.conf. (2 = thermistor;
|
||||
startup, consult lm_sensors's /etc/sensors.conf. (4 = thermistor;
|
||||
3 = thermal diode)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -163,16 +163,6 @@ configured individually according to the following options.
|
||||
* pwm#_auto_pwm_min - this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off
|
||||
temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255)
|
||||
|
||||
* pwm#_auto_pwm_freq - select base frequency of PWM output. You can select
|
||||
in range of 10.0 to 94.0 Hz in .1 Hz units.
|
||||
(Values 100 to 940).
|
||||
|
||||
The pwm#_auto_pwm_freq can be set to one of the following 8 values. Setting the
|
||||
frequency to a value not on this list, will result in the next higher frequency
|
||||
being selected. The actual device frequency may vary slightly from this
|
||||
specification as designed by the manufacturer. Consult the datasheet for more
|
||||
details. (PWM Frequency values: 100, 150, 230, 300, 380, 470, 620, 940)
|
||||
|
||||
* pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl - this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature
|
||||
the bahaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at
|
||||
pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off.
|
||||
|
@ -65,11 +65,10 @@ The LM87 has four pins which can serve one of two possible functions,
|
||||
depending on the hardware configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
Some functions share pins, so not all functions are available at the same
|
||||
time. Which are depends on the hardware setup. This driver assumes that
|
||||
the BIOS configured the chip correctly. In that respect, it differs from
|
||||
the original driver (from lm_sensors for Linux 2.4), which would force the
|
||||
LM87 to an arbitrary, compile-time chosen mode, regardless of the actual
|
||||
chipset wiring.
|
||||
time. Which are depends on the hardware setup. This driver normally
|
||||
assumes that firmware configured the chip correctly. Where this is not
|
||||
the case, platform code must set the I2C client's platform_data to point
|
||||
to a u8 value to be written to the channel register.
|
||||
|
||||
For reference, here is the list of exclusive functions:
|
||||
- in0+in5 (default) or temp3
|
||||
|
@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Supported chips:
|
||||
Prefix: 'lm99'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
|
||||
http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM89.html
|
||||
http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM89.html
|
||||
* National Semiconductor LM99
|
||||
Prefix: 'lm99'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
|
||||
@ -21,18 +21,32 @@ Supported chips:
|
||||
Prefix: 'lm86'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
|
||||
http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM86.html
|
||||
http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM86.html
|
||||
* Analog Devices ADM1032
|
||||
Prefix: 'adm1032'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
|
||||
http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,2877,ADM1032,00.html
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website
|
||||
http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADM1032
|
||||
* Analog Devices ADT7461
|
||||
Prefix: 'adt7461'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
|
||||
http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,2877,ADT7461,00.html
|
||||
Note: Only if in ADM1032 compatibility mode
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website
|
||||
http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461
|
||||
* Maxim MAX6646
|
||||
Prefix: 'max6646'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4d
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
|
||||
http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
|
||||
* Maxim MAX6647
|
||||
Prefix: 'max6646'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4e
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
|
||||
http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
|
||||
* Maxim MAX6649
|
||||
Prefix: 'max6646'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
|
||||
http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
|
||||
* Maxim MAX6657
|
||||
Prefix: 'max6657'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
|
||||
@ -70,25 +84,21 @@ Description
|
||||
|
||||
The LM90 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as
|
||||
well as the temperature of up to one external diode. It is compatible
|
||||
with many other devices such as the LM86, the LM89, the LM99, the ADM1032,
|
||||
the MAX6657, MAX6658, MAX6659, MAX6680 and the MAX6681 all of which are
|
||||
supported by this driver.
|
||||
with many other devices, many of which are supported by this driver.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that there is no easy way to differentiate between the MAX6657,
|
||||
MAX6658 and MAX6659 variants. The extra address and features of the
|
||||
MAX6659 are not supported by this driver. The MAX6680 and MAX6681 only
|
||||
differ in their pinout, therefore they obviously can't (and don't need to)
|
||||
be distinguished. Additionally, the ADT7461 is supported if found in
|
||||
ADM1032 compatibility mode.
|
||||
be distinguished.
|
||||
|
||||
The specificity of this family of chipsets over the ADM1021/LM84
|
||||
family is that it features critical limits with hysteresis, and an
|
||||
increased resolution of the remote temperature measurement.
|
||||
|
||||
The different chipsets of the family are not strictly identical, although
|
||||
very similar. This driver doesn't handle any specific feature for now,
|
||||
with the exception of SMBus PEC. For reference, here comes a non-exhaustive
|
||||
list of specific features:
|
||||
very similar. For reference, here comes a non-exhaustive list of specific
|
||||
features:
|
||||
|
||||
LM90:
|
||||
* Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF.
|
||||
@ -114,9 +124,11 @@ ADT7461:
|
||||
* Lower resolution for remote temperature
|
||||
|
||||
MAX6657 and MAX6658:
|
||||
* Better local resolution
|
||||
* Remote sensor type selection
|
||||
|
||||
MAX6659:
|
||||
* Better local resolution
|
||||
* Selectable address
|
||||
* Second critical temperature limit
|
||||
* Remote sensor type selection
|
||||
@ -127,7 +139,8 @@ MAX6680 and MAX6681:
|
||||
|
||||
All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution
|
||||
is 1.0 degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote
|
||||
temperature.
|
||||
temperature, except for the MAX6657, MAX6658 and MAX6659 which have a
|
||||
resolution of 0.125 degree for both temperatures.
|
||||
|
||||
Each sensor has its own high and low limits, plus a critical limit.
|
||||
Additionally, there is a relative hysteresis value common to both critical
|
||||
|
@ -5,12 +5,7 @@ Supported chips:
|
||||
* National Semiconductor PC87360, PC87363, PC87364, PC87365 and PC87366
|
||||
Prefixes: 'pc87360', 'pc87363', 'pc87364', 'pc87365', 'pc87366'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
|
||||
Datasheets:
|
||||
http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87360.html
|
||||
http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87363.html
|
||||
http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87364.html
|
||||
http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87365.html
|
||||
http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87366.html
|
||||
Datasheets: No longer available
|
||||
|
||||
Authors: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Supported chips:
|
||||
* National Semiconductor PC87427
|
||||
Prefix: 'pc87427'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
|
||||
Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com.tw/E-WINBONDHTM/partner/apc_007.html
|
||||
Datasheet: No longer available
|
||||
|
||||
Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ in6=255
|
||||
|
||||
# PWM
|
||||
|
||||
Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F (may apply to other Asus
|
||||
* Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F (may apply to other Asus
|
||||
chips as well) by Jean Delvare as of 2004-04-09:
|
||||
|
||||
AS99127F revision 2 seems to have two PWM registers at 0x59 and 0x5A,
|
||||
@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ Please contact us if you can figure out how it is supposed to work. As
|
||||
long as we don't know more, the w83781d driver doesn't handle PWM on
|
||||
AS99127F chips at all.
|
||||
|
||||
Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F rev.1 by Hector Martin:
|
||||
* Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F rev.1 by Hector Martin:
|
||||
|
||||
I've been fiddling around with the (in)famous 0x59 register and
|
||||
found out the following values do work as a form of coarse pwm:
|
||||
@ -418,3 +418,36 @@ change.
|
||||
My mobo is an ASUS A7V266-E. This behavior is similar to what I got
|
||||
with speedfan under Windows, where 0-15% would be off, 15-2x% (can't
|
||||
remember the exact value) would be 70% and higher would be full on.
|
||||
|
||||
* Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F rev.1 from lm-sensors
|
||||
ticket #2350:
|
||||
|
||||
I conducted some experiment on Asus P3B-F motherboard with AS99127F
|
||||
(Ver. 1).
|
||||
|
||||
I confirm that 0x59 register control the CPU_Fan Header on this
|
||||
motherboard, and 0x5a register control PWR_Fan.
|
||||
|
||||
In order to reduce the dependency of specific fan, the measurement is
|
||||
conducted with a digital scope without fan connected. I found out that
|
||||
P3B-F actually output variable DC voltage on fan header center pin,
|
||||
looks like PWM is filtered on this motherboard.
|
||||
|
||||
Here are some of measurements:
|
||||
|
||||
0x80 20 mV
|
||||
0x81 20 mV
|
||||
0x82 232 mV
|
||||
0x83 1.2 V
|
||||
0x84 2.31 V
|
||||
0x85 3.44 V
|
||||
0x86 4.62 V
|
||||
0x87 5.81 V
|
||||
0x88 7.01 V
|
||||
9x89 8.22 V
|
||||
0x8a 9.42 V
|
||||
0x8b 10.6 V
|
||||
0x8c 11.9 V
|
||||
0x8d 12.4 V
|
||||
0x8e 12.4 V
|
||||
0x8f 12.4 V
|
||||
|
@ -58,29 +58,35 @@ internal state that allows no clean access (Bank with ID register is not
|
||||
currently selected). If you know the address of the chip, use a 'force'
|
||||
parameter; this will put it into a more well-behaved state first.
|
||||
|
||||
The driver implements three temperature sensors, five fan rotation speed
|
||||
sensors, and ten voltage sensors.
|
||||
The driver implements three temperature sensors, ten voltage sensors,
|
||||
five fan rotation speed sensors and manual PWM control of each fan.
|
||||
|
||||
Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1
|
||||
degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when
|
||||
the temperature gets higher than the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays
|
||||
on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value.
|
||||
|
||||
Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts.
|
||||
An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
|
||||
or maximum limit.
|
||||
|
||||
Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
|
||||
triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
|
||||
readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
|
||||
32, 64 or 128 for all fans) to give the readings more range or accuracy.
|
||||
|
||||
Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts.
|
||||
An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
|
||||
or maximum limit.
|
||||
Each fan controlled is controlled by PWM. The PWM duty cycle can be read and
|
||||
set for each fan separately. Valid values range from 0 (stop) to 255 (full).
|
||||
PWM 1-3 support Thermal Cruise mode, in which the PWMs are automatically
|
||||
regulated to keep respectively temp 1-3 at a certain target temperature.
|
||||
See below for the description of the sysfs-interface.
|
||||
|
||||
The w83791d has a global bit used to enable beeping from the speaker when an
|
||||
alarm is triggered as well as a bitmask to enable or disable the beep for
|
||||
specific alarms. You need both the global beep enable bit and the
|
||||
corresponding beep bit to be on for a triggered alarm to sound a beep.
|
||||
|
||||
The sysfs interface to the gloabal enable is via the sysfs beep_enable file.
|
||||
The sysfs interface to the global enable is via the sysfs beep_enable file.
|
||||
This file is used for both legacy and new code.
|
||||
|
||||
The sysfs interface to the beep bitmask has migrated from the original legacy
|
||||
@ -105,6 +111,27 @@ going forward.
|
||||
The driver reads the hardware chip values at most once every three seconds.
|
||||
User mode code requesting values more often will receive cached values.
|
||||
|
||||
/sys files
|
||||
----------
|
||||
The sysfs-interface is documented in the 'sysfs-interface' file. Only
|
||||
chip-specific options are documented here.
|
||||
|
||||
pwm[1-3]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control for
|
||||
fan 1-3. Fan/PWM 4-5 only support manual mode.
|
||||
* 1 Manual mode
|
||||
* 2 Thermal Cruise mode
|
||||
* 3 Fan Speed Cruise mode (no further support)
|
||||
|
||||
temp[1-3]_target - defines the target temperature for Thermal Cruise mode.
|
||||
Unit: millidegree Celsius
|
||||
RW
|
||||
|
||||
temp[1-3]_tolerance - temperature tolerance for Thermal Cruise mode.
|
||||
Specifies an interval around the target temperature
|
||||
in which the fan speed is not changed.
|
||||
Unit: millidegree Celsius
|
||||
RW
|
||||
|
||||
Alarms bitmap vs. beep_mask bitmask
|
||||
------------------------------------
|
||||
For legacy code using the alarms and beep_mask files:
|
||||
@ -132,7 +159,3 @@ tart2 : alarms: 0x020000 beep_mask: 0x080000 <== mismatch
|
||||
tart3 : alarms: 0x040000 beep_mask: 0x100000 <== mismatch
|
||||
case_open : alarms: 0x001000 beep_mask: 0x001000
|
||||
global_enable: alarms: -------- beep_mask: 0x800000 (modified via beep_enable)
|
||||
|
||||
W83791D TODO:
|
||||
---------------
|
||||
Provide a patch for smart-fan control (still need appropriate motherboard/fans)
|
||||
|
@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ Supported adapters:
|
||||
* VIA Technologies, Inc. CX700
|
||||
Datasheet: available on request and under NDA from VIA
|
||||
|
||||
* VIA Technologies, Inc. VX800/VX820
|
||||
Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw
|
||||
|
||||
Authors:
|
||||
Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
|
||||
Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
|
||||
@ -49,6 +52,7 @@ Your lspci -n listing must show one of these :
|
||||
device 1106:3372 (VT8237S)
|
||||
device 1106:3287 (VT8251)
|
||||
device 1106:8324 (CX700)
|
||||
device 1106:8353 (VX800/VX820)
|
||||
|
||||
If none of these show up, you should look in the BIOS for settings like
|
||||
enable ACPI / SMBus or even USB.
|
||||
@ -57,5 +61,5 @@ Except for the oldest chips (VT82C596A/B, VT82C686A and most probably
|
||||
VT8231), this driver supports I2C block transactions. Such transactions
|
||||
are mainly useful to read from and write to EEPROMs.
|
||||
|
||||
The CX700 additionally appears to support SMBus PEC, although this driver
|
||||
doesn't implement it yet.
|
||||
The CX700/VX800/VX820 additionally appears to support SMBus PEC, although
|
||||
this driver doesn't implement it yet.
|
||||
|
@ -4,6 +4,10 @@ the /dev interface. You need to load module i2c-dev for this.
|
||||
|
||||
Each registered i2c adapter gets a number, counting from 0. You can
|
||||
examine /sys/class/i2c-dev/ to see what number corresponds to which adapter.
|
||||
Alternatively, you can run "i2cdetect -l" to obtain a formated list of all
|
||||
i2c adapters present on your system at a given time. i2cdetect is part of
|
||||
the i2c-tools package.
|
||||
|
||||
I2C device files are character device files with major device number 89
|
||||
and a minor device number corresponding to the number assigned as
|
||||
explained above. They should be called "i2c-%d" (i2c-0, i2c-1, ...,
|
||||
@ -17,30 +21,34 @@ So let's say you want to access an i2c adapter from a C program. The
|
||||
first thing to do is "#include <linux/i2c-dev.h>". Please note that
|
||||
there are two files named "i2c-dev.h" out there, one is distributed
|
||||
with the Linux kernel and is meant to be included from kernel
|
||||
driver code, the other one is distributed with lm_sensors and is
|
||||
driver code, the other one is distributed with i2c-tools and is
|
||||
meant to be included from user-space programs. You obviously want
|
||||
the second one here.
|
||||
|
||||
Now, you have to decide which adapter you want to access. You should
|
||||
inspect /sys/class/i2c-dev/ to decide this. Adapter numbers are assigned
|
||||
somewhat dynamically, so you can not even assume /dev/i2c-0 is the
|
||||
first adapter.
|
||||
inspect /sys/class/i2c-dev/ or run "i2cdetect -l" to decide this.
|
||||
Adapter numbers are assigned somewhat dynamically, so you can not
|
||||
assume much about them. They can even change from one boot to the next.
|
||||
|
||||
Next thing, open the device file, as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
int file;
|
||||
int adapter_nr = 2; /* probably dynamically determined */
|
||||
char filename[20];
|
||||
|
||||
sprintf(filename,"/dev/i2c-%d",adapter_nr);
|
||||
if ((file = open(filename,O_RDWR)) < 0) {
|
||||
snprintf(filename, 19, "/dev/i2c-%d", adapter_nr);
|
||||
file = open(filename, O_RDWR);
|
||||
if (file < 0) {
|
||||
/* ERROR HANDLING; you can check errno to see what went wrong */
|
||||
exit(1);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
When you have opened the device, you must specify with what device
|
||||
address you want to communicate:
|
||||
|
||||
int addr = 0x40; /* The I2C address */
|
||||
if (ioctl(file,I2C_SLAVE,addr) < 0) {
|
||||
|
||||
if (ioctl(file, I2C_SLAVE, addr) < 0) {
|
||||
/* ERROR HANDLING; you can check errno to see what went wrong */
|
||||
exit(1);
|
||||
}
|
||||
@ -48,31 +56,41 @@ address you want to communicate:
|
||||
Well, you are all set up now. You can now use SMBus commands or plain
|
||||
I2C to communicate with your device. SMBus commands are preferred if
|
||||
the device supports them. Both are illustrated below.
|
||||
|
||||
__u8 register = 0x10; /* Device register to access */
|
||||
__s32 res;
|
||||
char buf[10];
|
||||
|
||||
/* Using SMBus commands */
|
||||
res = i2c_smbus_read_word_data(file,register);
|
||||
res = i2c_smbus_read_word_data(file, register);
|
||||
if (res < 0) {
|
||||
/* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */
|
||||
} else {
|
||||
/* res contains the read word */
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/* Using I2C Write, equivalent of
|
||||
i2c_smbus_write_word_data(file,register,0x6543) */
|
||||
i2c_smbus_write_word_data(file, register, 0x6543) */
|
||||
buf[0] = register;
|
||||
buf[1] = 0x43;
|
||||
buf[2] = 0x65;
|
||||
if ( write(file,buf,3) != 3) {
|
||||
if (write(file, buf, 3) ! =3) {
|
||||
/* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/* Using I2C Read, equivalent of i2c_smbus_read_byte(file) */
|
||||
if (read(file,buf,1) != 1) {
|
||||
if (read(file, buf, 1) != 1) {
|
||||
/* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */
|
||||
} else {
|
||||
/* buf[0] contains the read byte */
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Note that only a subset of the I2C and SMBus protocols can be achieved by
|
||||
the means of read() and write() calls. In particular, so-called combined
|
||||
transactions (mixing read and write messages in the same transaction)
|
||||
aren't supported. For this reason, this interface is almost never used by
|
||||
user-space programs.
|
||||
|
||||
IMPORTANT: because of the use of inline functions, you *have* to use
|
||||
'-O' or some variation when you compile your program!
|
||||
|
||||
@ -80,31 +98,29 @@ IMPORTANT: because of the use of inline functions, you *have* to use
|
||||
Full interface description
|
||||
==========================
|
||||
|
||||
The following IOCTLs are defined and fully supported
|
||||
(see also i2c-dev.h):
|
||||
The following IOCTLs are defined:
|
||||
|
||||
ioctl(file,I2C_SLAVE,long addr)
|
||||
ioctl(file, I2C_SLAVE, long addr)
|
||||
Change slave address. The address is passed in the 7 lower bits of the
|
||||
argument (except for 10 bit addresses, passed in the 10 lower bits in this
|
||||
case).
|
||||
|
||||
ioctl(file,I2C_TENBIT,long select)
|
||||
ioctl(file, I2C_TENBIT, long select)
|
||||
Selects ten bit addresses if select not equals 0, selects normal 7 bit
|
||||
addresses if select equals 0. Default 0. This request is only valid
|
||||
if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_10BIT_ADDR.
|
||||
|
||||
ioctl(file,I2C_PEC,long select)
|
||||
ioctl(file, I2C_PEC, long select)
|
||||
Selects SMBus PEC (packet error checking) generation and verification
|
||||
if select not equals 0, disables if select equals 0. Default 0.
|
||||
Used only for SMBus transactions. This request only has an effect if the
|
||||
the adapter has I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_PEC; it is still safe if not, it just
|
||||
doesn't have any effect.
|
||||
|
||||
ioctl(file,I2C_FUNCS,unsigned long *funcs)
|
||||
ioctl(file, I2C_FUNCS, unsigned long *funcs)
|
||||
Gets the adapter functionality and puts it in *funcs.
|
||||
|
||||
ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset)
|
||||
|
||||
ioctl(file, I2C_RDWR, struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset)
|
||||
Do combined read/write transaction without stop in between.
|
||||
Only valid if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_I2C. The argument is
|
||||
a pointer to a
|
||||
@ -120,10 +136,9 @@ ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset)
|
||||
The slave address and whether to use ten bit address mode has to be
|
||||
set in each message, overriding the values set with the above ioctl's.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Other values are NOT supported at this moment, except for I2C_SMBUS,
|
||||
which you should never directly call; instead, use the access functions
|
||||
below.
|
||||
ioctl(file, I2C_SMBUS, struct i2c_smbus_ioctl_data *args)
|
||||
Not meant to be called directly; instead, use the access functions
|
||||
below.
|
||||
|
||||
You can do plain i2c transactions by using read(2) and write(2) calls.
|
||||
You do not need to pass the address byte; instead, set it through
|
||||
@ -148,7 +163,52 @@ what happened. The 'write' transactions return 0 on success; the
|
||||
returns the number of values read. The block buffers need not be longer
|
||||
than 32 bytes.
|
||||
|
||||
The above functions are all macros, that resolve to calls to the
|
||||
i2c_smbus_access function, that on its turn calls a specific ioctl
|
||||
The above functions are all inline functions, that resolve to calls to
|
||||
the i2c_smbus_access function, that on its turn calls a specific ioctl
|
||||
with the data in a specific format. Read the source code if you
|
||||
want to know what happens behind the screens.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Implementation details
|
||||
======================
|
||||
|
||||
For the interested, here's the code flow which happens inside the kernel
|
||||
when you use the /dev interface to I2C:
|
||||
|
||||
1* Your program opens /dev/i2c-N and calls ioctl() on it, as described in
|
||||
section "C example" above.
|
||||
|
||||
2* These open() and ioctl() calls are handled by the i2c-dev kernel
|
||||
driver: see i2c-dev.c:i2cdev_open() and i2c-dev.c:i2cdev_ioctl(),
|
||||
respectively. You can think of i2c-dev as a generic I2C chip driver
|
||||
that can be programmed from user-space.
|
||||
|
||||
3* Some ioctl() calls are for administrative tasks and are handled by
|
||||
i2c-dev directly. Examples include I2C_SLAVE (set the address of the
|
||||
device you want to access) and I2C_PEC (enable or disable SMBus error
|
||||
checking on future transactions.)
|
||||
|
||||
4* Other ioctl() calls are converted to in-kernel function calls by
|
||||
i2c-dev. Examples include I2C_FUNCS, which queries the I2C adapter
|
||||
functionality using i2c.h:i2c_get_functionality(), and I2C_SMBUS, which
|
||||
performs an SMBus transaction using i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer().
|
||||
|
||||
The i2c-dev driver is responsible for checking all the parameters that
|
||||
come from user-space for validity. After this point, there is no
|
||||
difference between these calls that came from user-space through i2c-dev
|
||||
and calls that would have been performed by kernel I2C chip drivers
|
||||
directly. This means that I2C bus drivers don't need to implement
|
||||
anything special to support access from user-space.
|
||||
|
||||
5* These i2c-core.c/i2c.h functions are wrappers to the actual
|
||||
implementation of your I2C bus driver. Each adapter must declare
|
||||
callback functions implementing these standard calls.
|
||||
i2c.h:i2c_get_functionality() calls i2c_adapter.algo->functionality(),
|
||||
while i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer() calls either
|
||||
adapter.algo->smbus_xfer() if it is implemented, or if not,
|
||||
i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer_emulated() which in turn calls
|
||||
i2c_adapter.algo->master_xfer().
|
||||
|
||||
After your I2C bus driver has processed these requests, execution runs
|
||||
up the call chain, with almost no processing done, except by i2c-dev to
|
||||
package the returned data, if any, in suitable format for the ioctl.
|
||||
|
@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ specified through the Comm byte.
|
||||
S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] DataLow [A] DataHigh [A] P
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SMBus Process Call
|
||||
==================
|
||||
SMBus Process Call: i2c_smbus_process_call()
|
||||
=============================================
|
||||
|
||||
This command selects a device register (through the Comm byte), sends
|
||||
16 bits of data to it, and reads 16 bits of data in return.
|
||||
|
@ -606,6 +606,8 @@ SMBus communication
|
||||
extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command);
|
||||
extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client * client,
|
||||
u8 command, u16 value);
|
||||
extern s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client *client,
|
||||
u8 command, u16 value);
|
||||
extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
|
||||
u8 command, u8 *values);
|
||||
extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
|
||||
@ -621,8 +623,6 @@ These ones were removed from i2c-core because they had no users, but could
|
||||
be added back later if needed:
|
||||
|
||||
extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value);
|
||||
extern s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client * client,
|
||||
u8 command, u16 value);
|
||||
extern s32 i2c_smbus_block_process_call(struct i2c_client *client,
|
||||
u8 command, u8 length,
|
||||
u8 *values)
|
||||
|
@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
|
||||
Currently, kvm module in EXPERIMENTAL stage on IA64. This means that
|
||||
interfaces are not stable enough to use. So, plase had better don't run
|
||||
critical applications in virtual machine. We will try our best to make it
|
||||
strong in future versions!
|
||||
Currently, kvm module is in EXPERIMENTAL stage on IA64. This means that
|
||||
interfaces are not stable enough to use. So, please don't run critical
|
||||
applications in virtual machine.
|
||||
We will try our best to improve it in future versions!
|
||||
|
||||
Guide: How to boot up guests on kvm/ia64
|
||||
|
||||
This guide is to describe how to enable kvm support for IA-64 systems.
|
||||
|
@ -92,6 +92,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
|
||||
'J' 00-1F drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h
|
||||
'K' all linux/kd.h
|
||||
'L' 00-1F linux/loop.h
|
||||
'L' 20-2F driver/usb/misc/vstusb.h
|
||||
'L' E0-FF linux/ppdd.h encrypted disk device driver
|
||||
<http://linux01.gwdg.de/~alatham/ppdd.html>
|
||||
'M' all linux/soundcard.h
|
||||
@ -110,6 +111,8 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
|
||||
'W' 00-1F linux/wanrouter.h conflict!
|
||||
'X' all linux/xfs_fs.h
|
||||
'Y' all linux/cyclades.h
|
||||
'[' 00-07 linux/usb/usbtmc.h USB Test and Measurement Devices
|
||||
<mailto:gregkh@suse.de>
|
||||
'a' all ATM on linux
|
||||
<http://lrcwww.epfl.ch/linux-atm/magic.html>
|
||||
'b' 00-FF bit3 vme host bridge
|
||||
|
@ -796,6 +796,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size
|
||||
if not specified.
|
||||
|
||||
i8042.debug [HW] Toggle i8042 debug mode
|
||||
i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode
|
||||
i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from
|
||||
keyboard and cannot control its state
|
||||
@ -1713,6 +1714,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
autoconfiguration.
|
||||
Ranges are in pairs (memory base and size).
|
||||
|
||||
dynamic_printk
|
||||
Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if
|
||||
CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled. These can also
|
||||
be switched on/off via <debugfs>/dynamic_printk/modules
|
||||
|
||||
print-fatal-signals=
|
||||
[KNL] debug: print fatal signals
|
||||
print-fatal-signals=1: print segfault info to
|
||||
@ -2247,6 +2253,25 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
autosuspended. Devices for which the delay is set
|
||||
to a negative value won't be autosuspended at all.
|
||||
|
||||
usbcore.usbfs_snoop=
|
||||
[USB] Set to log all usbfs traffic (default 0 = off).
|
||||
|
||||
usbcore.blinkenlights=
|
||||
[USB] Set to cycle leds on hubs (default 0 = off).
|
||||
|
||||
usbcore.old_scheme_first=
|
||||
[USB] Start with the old device initialization
|
||||
scheme (default 0 = off).
|
||||
|
||||
usbcore.use_both_schemes=
|
||||
[USB] Try the other device initialization scheme
|
||||
if the first one fails (default 1 = enabled).
|
||||
|
||||
usbcore.initial_descriptor_timeout=
|
||||
[USB] Specifies timeout for the initial 64-byte
|
||||
USB_REQ_GET_DESCRIPTOR request in milliseconds
|
||||
(default 5000 = 5.0 seconds).
|
||||
|
||||
usbhid.mousepoll=
|
||||
[USBHID] The interval which mice are to be polled at.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -118,6 +118,10 @@ the name of the kobject, call kobject_rename():
|
||||
|
||||
int kobject_rename(struct kobject *kobj, const char *new_name);
|
||||
|
||||
Note kobject_rename does perform any locking or have a solid notion of
|
||||
what names are valid so the provide must provide their own sanity checking
|
||||
and serialization.
|
||||
|
||||
There is a function called kobject_set_name() but that is legacy cruft and
|
||||
is being removed. If your code needs to call this function, it is
|
||||
incorrect and needs to be fixed.
|
||||
|
149
Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
Normal file
149
Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
|
||||
Hard disk shock protection
|
||||
==========================
|
||||
|
||||
Author: Elias Oltmanns <eo@nebensachen.de>
|
||||
Last modified: 2008-10-03
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
0. Contents
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
1. Intro
|
||||
2. The interface
|
||||
3. References
|
||||
4. CREDITS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1. Intro
|
||||
--------
|
||||
|
||||
ATA/ATAPI-7 specifies the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with unload feature.
|
||||
Issuing this command should cause the drive to switch to idle mode and
|
||||
unload disk heads. This feature is being used in modern laptops in
|
||||
conjunction with accelerometers and appropriate software to implement
|
||||
a shock protection facility. The idea is to stop all I/O operations on
|
||||
the internal hard drive and park its heads on the ramp when critical
|
||||
situations are anticipated. The desire to have such a feature
|
||||
available on GNU/Linux systems has been the original motivation to
|
||||
implement a generic disk head parking interface in the Linux kernel.
|
||||
Please note, however, that other components have to be set up on your
|
||||
system in order to get disk shock protection working (see
|
||||
section 3. References below for pointers to more information about
|
||||
that).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2. The interface
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
|
||||
For each ATA device, the kernel exports the file
|
||||
block/*/device/unload_heads in sysfs (here assumed to be mounted under
|
||||
/sys). Access to /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads is denied with
|
||||
-EOPNOTSUPP if the device does not support the unload feature.
|
||||
Otherwise, writing an integer value to this file will take the heads
|
||||
of the respective drive off the platter and block all I/O operations
|
||||
for the specified number of milliseconds. When the timeout expires and
|
||||
no further disk head park request has been issued in the meantime,
|
||||
normal operation will be resumed. The maximal value accepted for a
|
||||
timeout is 30000 milliseconds. Exceeding this limit will return
|
||||
-EOVERFLOW, but heads will be parked anyway and the timeout will be
|
||||
set to 30 seconds. However, you can always change a timeout to any
|
||||
value between 0 and 30000 by issuing a subsequent head park request
|
||||
before the timeout of the previous one has expired. In particular, the
|
||||
total timeout can exceed 30 seconds and, more importantly, you can
|
||||
cancel a previously set timeout and resume normal operation
|
||||
immediately by specifying a timeout of 0. Values below -2 are rejected
|
||||
with -EINVAL (see below for the special meaning of -1 and -2). If the
|
||||
timeout specified for a recent head park request has not yet expired,
|
||||
reading from /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads will report the number
|
||||
of milliseconds remaining until normal operation will be resumed;
|
||||
otherwise, reading the unload_heads attribute will return 0.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, do the following in order to park the heads of drive
|
||||
/dev/sda and stop all I/O operations for five seconds:
|
||||
|
||||
# echo 5000 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
|
||||
|
||||
A simple
|
||||
|
||||
# cat /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
|
||||
|
||||
will show you how many milliseconds are left before normal operation
|
||||
will be resumed.
|
||||
|
||||
A word of caution: The fact that the interface operates on a basis of
|
||||
milliseconds may raise expectations that cannot be satisfied in
|
||||
reality. In fact, the ATA specs clearly state that the time for an
|
||||
unload operation to complete is vendor specific. The hint in ATA-7
|
||||
that this will typically be within 500 milliseconds apparently has
|
||||
been dropped in ATA-8.
|
||||
|
||||
There is a technical detail of this implementation that may cause some
|
||||
confusion and should be discussed here. When a head park request has
|
||||
been issued to a device successfully, all I/O operations on the
|
||||
controller port this device is attached to will be deferred. That is
|
||||
to say, any other device that may be connected to the same port will
|
||||
be affected too. The only exception is that a subsequent head unload
|
||||
request to that other device will be executed immediately. Further
|
||||
operations on that port will be deferred until the timeout specified
|
||||
for either device on the port has expired. As far as PATA (old style
|
||||
IDE) configurations are concerned, there can only be two devices
|
||||
attached to any single port. In SATA world we have port multipliers
|
||||
which means that a user-issued head parking request to one device may
|
||||
actually result in stopping I/O to a whole bunch of devices. However,
|
||||
since this feature is supposed to be used on laptops and does not seem
|
||||
to be very useful in any other environment, there will be mostly one
|
||||
device per port. Even if the CD/DVD writer happens to be connected to
|
||||
the same port as the hard drive, it generally *should* recover just
|
||||
fine from the occasional buffer under-run incurred by a head park
|
||||
request to the HD. Actually, when you are using an ide driver rather
|
||||
than its libata counterpart (i.e. your disk is called /dev/hda
|
||||
instead of /dev/sda), then parking the heads of one drive (drive X)
|
||||
will generally not affect the mode of operation of another drive
|
||||
(drive Y) on the same port as described above. It is only when a port
|
||||
reset is required to recover from an exception on drive Y that further
|
||||
I/O operations on that drive (and the reset itself) will be delayed
|
||||
until drive X is no longer in the parked state.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, there are some hard drives that only comply with an earlier
|
||||
version of the ATA standard than ATA-7, but do support the unload
|
||||
feature nonetheless. Unfortunately, there is no safe way Linux can
|
||||
detect these devices, so you won't be able to write to the
|
||||
unload_heads attribute. If you know that your device really does
|
||||
support the unload feature (for instance, because the vendor of your
|
||||
laptop or the hard drive itself told you so), then you can tell the
|
||||
kernel to enable the usage of this feature for that drive by writing
|
||||
the special value -1 to the unload_heads attribute:
|
||||
|
||||
# echo -1 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
|
||||
|
||||
will enable the feature for /dev/sda, and giving -2 instead of -1 will
|
||||
disable it again.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3. References
|
||||
-------------
|
||||
|
||||
There are several laptops from different vendors featuring shock
|
||||
protection capabilities. As manufacturers have refused to support open
|
||||
source development of the required software components so far, Linux
|
||||
support for shock protection varies considerably between different
|
||||
hardware implementations. Ideally, this section should contain a list
|
||||
of pointers at different projects aiming at an implementation of shock
|
||||
protection on different systems. Unfortunately, I only know of a
|
||||
single project which, although still considered experimental, is fit
|
||||
for use. Please feel free to add projects that have been the victims
|
||||
of my ignorance.
|
||||
|
||||
- http://www.thinkwiki.org/wiki/HDAPS
|
||||
See this page for information about Linux support of the hard disk
|
||||
active protection system as implemented in IBM/Lenovo Thinkpads.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4. CREDITS
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
This implementation of disk head parking has been inspired by a patch
|
||||
originally published by Jon Escombe <lists@dresco.co.uk>. My efforts
|
||||
to develop an implementation of this feature that is fit to be merged
|
||||
into mainline have been aided by various kernel developers, in
|
||||
particular by Tejun Heo and Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz.
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ NOTE
|
||||
----
|
||||
|
||||
This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version
|
||||
has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton <andrewm@uow.edu.au>
|
||||
has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton.
|
||||
|
||||
Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as
|
||||
described below. In general, you should use the driver version which
|
||||
@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ latest drivers and technical publications.
|
||||
6.4 Current maintainer
|
||||
|
||||
In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew
|
||||
Morton <akpm@zip.com.au>
|
||||
Morton.
|
||||
|
||||
6.5 Kernel module parameters
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -146,8 +146,8 @@ WARNING:
|
||||
When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an
|
||||
intrinsic race condition whereby writability might be lost between the
|
||||
polling and the writing system calls. In this case, the socket will
|
||||
block until write because possible again, unless non-blocking mode
|
||||
becomes enabled.
|
||||
block until write becomes possible again, unless non-blocking mode
|
||||
is enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level:
|
||||
|
@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
|
||||
Documentation/networking/vortex.txt
|
||||
Andrew Morton <andrewm@uow.edu.au>
|
||||
Andrew Morton
|
||||
30 April 2000
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ The driver was written by Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com>
|
||||
Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver.
|
||||
Please report problems to one or more of:
|
||||
|
||||
Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>
|
||||
Andrew Morton
|
||||
Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org>
|
||||
Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
|
||||
|
||||
@ -305,11 +305,6 @@ Donald's wake-on-LAN page:
|
||||
|
||||
ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe
|
||||
|
||||
Driver updates and a detailed changelog for the modifications which
|
||||
were made for the 2.3/2,4 series kernel is available at
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/#3c59x-bc
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Autonegotiation notes
|
||||
---------------------
|
||||
|
@ -1,5 +1,11 @@
|
||||
This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
|
||||
|
||||
* New configuration loop helper (as of 2.6.28)
|
||||
By calling pcmcia_loop_config(), a driver can iterate over all available
|
||||
configuration options. During a driver's probe() phase, one doesn't need
|
||||
to use pcmcia_get_{first,next}_tuple, pcmcia_get_tuple_data and
|
||||
pcmcia_parse_tuple directly in most if not all cases.
|
||||
|
||||
* New release helper (as of 2.6.17)
|
||||
Instead of calling pcmcia_release_{configuration,io,irq,win}, all that's
|
||||
necessary now is calling pcmcia_disable_device. As there is no valid
|
||||
|
@ -2,17 +2,8 @@ Regulator Machine Driver Interface
|
||||
===================================
|
||||
|
||||
The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific
|
||||
initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. Typical things that
|
||||
machine drivers would do are :-
|
||||
initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem.
|
||||
|
||||
1. Regulator -> Device mapping.
|
||||
2. Regulator supply configuration.
|
||||
3. Power Domain constraint setting.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1. Regulator -> device mapping
|
||||
==============================
|
||||
Consider the following machine :-
|
||||
|
||||
Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
|
||||
@ -21,81 +12,82 @@ Consider the following machine :-
|
||||
|
||||
The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in
|
||||
order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine
|
||||
initialisation code by calling :-
|
||||
initialisation code by creating a struct regulator_consumer_supply for
|
||||
each regulator.
|
||||
|
||||
int regulator_set_device_supply(const char *regulator, struct device *dev,
|
||||
const char *supply);
|
||||
struct regulator_consumer_supply {
|
||||
struct device *dev; /* consumer */
|
||||
const char *supply; /* consumer supply - e.g. "vcc" */
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
and is shown with the following code :-
|
||||
e.g. for the machine above
|
||||
|
||||
regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-1", devB, "Vcc");
|
||||
regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-2", devA, "Vcc");
|
||||
static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator1_consumers[] = {
|
||||
{
|
||||
.dev = &platform_consumerB_device.dev,
|
||||
.supply = "Vcc",
|
||||
},};
|
||||
|
||||
static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator2_consumers[] = {
|
||||
{
|
||||
.dev = &platform_consumerA_device.dev,
|
||||
.supply = "Vcc",
|
||||
},};
|
||||
|
||||
This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2
|
||||
to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A.
|
||||
|
||||
Constraints can now be registered by defining a struct regulator_init_data
|
||||
for each regulator power domain. This structure also maps the consumers
|
||||
to their supply regulator :-
|
||||
|
||||
2. Regulator supply configuration.
|
||||
==================================
|
||||
Consider the following machine (again) :-
|
||||
|
||||
Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
|
||||
|
|
||||
+-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
|
||||
static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = {
|
||||
.constraints = {
|
||||
.min_uV = 3300000,
|
||||
.max_uV = 3300000,
|
||||
.valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
|
||||
},
|
||||
.num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator1_consumers),
|
||||
.consumer_supplies = regulator1_consumers,
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered
|
||||
with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's
|
||||
supply (Regulator-2).
|
||||
supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator_dev
|
||||
field below:-
|
||||
|
||||
This relationship can be register with the core via :-
|
||||
|
||||
int regulator_set_supply(const char *regulator, const char *regulator_supply);
|
||||
|
||||
In this example we would use the following code :-
|
||||
|
||||
regulator_set_supply("Regulator-2", "Regulator-1");
|
||||
|
||||
Relationships can be queried by calling :-
|
||||
|
||||
const char *regulator_get_supply(const char *regulator);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3. Power Domain constraint setting.
|
||||
===================================
|
||||
Each power domain within a system has physical constraints on voltage and
|
||||
current. This must be defined in software so that the power domain is always
|
||||
operated within specifications.
|
||||
|
||||
Consider the following machine (again) :-
|
||||
|
||||
Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
|
||||
|
|
||||
+-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
|
||||
|
||||
This gives us two regulators and two power domains:
|
||||
|
||||
Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B.
|
||||
Domain 2: Consumer A.
|
||||
|
||||
Constraints can be registered by calling :-
|
||||
|
||||
int regulator_set_platform_constraints(const char *regulator,
|
||||
struct regulation_constraints *constraints);
|
||||
|
||||
The example is defined as follows :-
|
||||
|
||||
struct regulation_constraints domain_1 = {
|
||||
.min_uV = 3300000,
|
||||
.max_uV = 3300000,
|
||||
.valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
|
||||
static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = {
|
||||
.supply_regulator_dev = &platform_regulator1_device.dev,
|
||||
.constraints = {
|
||||
.min_uV = 1800000,
|
||||
.max_uV = 2000000,
|
||||
.valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE,
|
||||
.valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
|
||||
},
|
||||
.num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator2_consumers),
|
||||
.consumer_supplies = regulator2_consumers,
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct regulation_constraints domain_2 = {
|
||||
.min_uV = 1800000,
|
||||
.max_uV = 2000000,
|
||||
.valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE,
|
||||
.valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
|
||||
};
|
||||
Finally the regulator devices must be registered in the usual manner.
|
||||
|
||||
regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-1", &domain_1);
|
||||
regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-2", &domain_2);
|
||||
static struct platform_device regulator_devices[] = {
|
||||
{
|
||||
.name = "regulator",
|
||||
.id = DCDC_1,
|
||||
.dev = {
|
||||
.platform_data = ®ulator1_data,
|
||||
},
|
||||
},
|
||||
{
|
||||
.name = "regulator",
|
||||
.id = DCDC_2,
|
||||
.dev = {
|
||||
.platform_data = ®ulator2_data,
|
||||
},
|
||||
},
|
||||
};
|
||||
/* register regulator 1 device */
|
||||
platform_device_register(&wm8350_regulator_devices[0]);
|
||||
|
||||
/* register regulator 2 device */
|
||||
platform_device_register(&wm8350_regulator_devices[1]);
|
||||
|
@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ Registration
|
||||
|
||||
Drivers can register a regulator by calling :-
|
||||
|
||||
struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc,
|
||||
void *reg_data);
|
||||
struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct device *dev,
|
||||
struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc);
|
||||
|
||||
This will register the regulators capabilities and operations the regulator
|
||||
core. The core does not touch reg_data (private to regulator driver).
|
||||
This will register the regulators capabilities and operations to the regulator
|
||||
core.
|
||||
|
||||
Regulators can be unregistered by calling :-
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -54,3 +54,21 @@ used to run with "radeonfb" (it's an ATI Radeon mobility). It turns out
|
||||
that "radeonfb" simply cannot resume that device - it tries to set the
|
||||
PLL's, and it just _hangs_. Using the regular VGA console and letting X
|
||||
resume it instead works fine.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE
|
||||
====
|
||||
pm_trace uses the system's Real Time Clock (RTC) to save the magic number.
|
||||
Reason for this is that the RTC is the only reliably available piece of
|
||||
hardware during resume operations where a value can be set that will
|
||||
survive a reboot.
|
||||
|
||||
Consequence is that after a resume (even if it is successful) your system
|
||||
clock will have a value corresponding to the magic mumber instead of the
|
||||
correct date/time! It is therefore advisable to use a program like ntp-date
|
||||
or rdate to reset the correct date/time from an external time source when
|
||||
using this trace option.
|
||||
|
||||
As the clock keeps ticking it is also essential that the reboot is done
|
||||
quickly after the resume failure. The trace option does not use the seconds
|
||||
or the low order bits of the minutes of the RTC, but a too long delay will
|
||||
corrupt the magic value.
|
||||
|
@ -18,10 +18,6 @@ mpc52xx.txt
|
||||
- Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family
|
||||
mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt
|
||||
- MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings
|
||||
ppc_htab.txt
|
||||
- info about the Linux/PPC /proc/ppc_htab entry
|
||||
smp.txt
|
||||
- use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines
|
||||
sound.txt
|
||||
- info on sound support under Linux/PPC
|
||||
zImage_layout.txt
|
||||
|
40
Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt
Normal file
40
Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
|
||||
* Freescale 83xx and 512x PCI bridges
|
||||
|
||||
Freescale 83xx and 512x SOCs include the same pci bridge core.
|
||||
|
||||
83xx/512x specific notes:
|
||||
- reg: should contain two address length tuples
|
||||
The first is for the internal pci bridge registers
|
||||
The second is for the pci config space access registers
|
||||
|
||||
Example (MPC8313ERDB)
|
||||
pci0: pci@e0008500 {
|
||||
cell-index = <1>;
|
||||
interrupt-map-mask = <0xf800 0x0 0x0 0x7>;
|
||||
interrupt-map = <
|
||||
/* IDSEL 0x0E -mini PCI */
|
||||
0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x1 &ipic 18 0x8
|
||||
0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x2 &ipic 18 0x8
|
||||
0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x3 &ipic 18 0x8
|
||||
0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x4 &ipic 18 0x8
|
||||
|
||||
/* IDSEL 0x0F - PCI slot */
|
||||
0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x1 &ipic 17 0x8
|
||||
0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x2 &ipic 18 0x8
|
||||
0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x3 &ipic 17 0x8
|
||||
0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x4 &ipic 18 0x8>;
|
||||
interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
|
||||
interrupts = <66 0x8>;
|
||||
bus-range = <0x0 0x0>;
|
||||
ranges = <0x02000000 0x0 0x90000000 0x90000000 0x0 0x10000000
|
||||
0x42000000 0x0 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x0 0x10000000
|
||||
0x01000000 0x0 0x00000000 0xe2000000 0x0 0x00100000>;
|
||||
clock-frequency = <66666666>;
|
||||
#interrupt-cells = <1>;
|
||||
#size-cells = <2>;
|
||||
#address-cells = <3>;
|
||||
reg = <0xe0008500 0x100 /* internal registers */
|
||||
0xe0008300 0x8>; /* config space access registers */
|
||||
compatible = "fsl,mpc8349-pci";
|
||||
device_type = "pci";
|
||||
};
|
40
Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt
Normal file
40
Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
|
||||
GPIO controllers on MPC8xxx SoCs
|
||||
|
||||
This is for the non-QE/CPM/GUTs GPIO controllers as found on
|
||||
8349, 8572, 8610 and compatible.
|
||||
|
||||
Every GPIO controller node must have #gpio-cells property defined,
|
||||
this information will be used to translate gpio-specifiers.
|
||||
|
||||
Required properties:
|
||||
- compatible : "fsl,<CHIP>-gpio" followed by "fsl,mpc8349-gpio" for
|
||||
83xx, "fsl,mpc8572-gpio" for 85xx and "fsl,mpc8610-gpio" for 86xx.
|
||||
- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
|
||||
second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused).
|
||||
- interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ (currently unused).
|
||||
- interrupt-parent : Phandle for the interrupt controller that
|
||||
services interrupts for this device.
|
||||
- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller.
|
||||
|
||||
Example of gpio-controller nodes for a MPC8347 SoC:
|
||||
|
||||
gpio1: gpio-controller@c00 {
|
||||
#gpio-cells = <2>;
|
||||
compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio";
|
||||
reg = <0xc00 0x100>;
|
||||
interrupts = <74 0x8>;
|
||||
interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
|
||||
gpio-controller;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
gpio2: gpio-controller@d00 {
|
||||
#gpio-cells = <2>;
|
||||
compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio";
|
||||
reg = <0xd00 0x100>;
|
||||
interrupts = <75 0x8>;
|
||||
interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
|
||||
gpio-controller;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
See booting-without-of.txt for details of how to specify GPIO
|
||||
information for devices.
|
@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Required properties:
|
||||
- compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is
|
||||
"fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor
|
||||
(mpc8349, mpc8350, etc.) and the second is
|
||||
"fsl,elo-dma-channel"
|
||||
"fsl,elo-dma-channel". However, see note below.
|
||||
- reg : <registers mapping for channel>
|
||||
- cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Required properties:
|
||||
- compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is
|
||||
"fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor
|
||||
(mpc8540, mpc8560, etc.) and the second is
|
||||
"fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"
|
||||
"fsl,eloplus-dma-channel". However, see note below.
|
||||
- cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0.
|
||||
- reg : <registers mapping for channel>
|
||||
- interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA channel IRQ>
|
||||
@ -125,3 +125,12 @@ Example:
|
||||
interrupts = <17 2>;
|
||||
};
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
Note on DMA channel compatible properties: The compatible property must say
|
||||
"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" to be used by the Elo DMA
|
||||
driver (fsldma). Any DMA channel used by fsldma cannot be used by another
|
||||
DMA driver, such as the SSI sound drivers for the MPC8610. Therefore, any DMA
|
||||
channel that should be used for another driver should not use
|
||||
"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel". For the SSI drivers, for
|
||||
example, the compatible property should be "fsl,ssi-dma-channel". See ssi.txt
|
||||
for more information.
|
||||
|
@ -24,6 +24,12 @@ Required properties:
|
||||
"rj-master" - r.j., SSI is clock master
|
||||
"ac97-slave" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock slave
|
||||
"ac97-master" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock master
|
||||
- fsl,playback-dma: phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for
|
||||
playback of audio. This is typically dictated by SOC
|
||||
design. See the notes below.
|
||||
- fsl,capture-dma: phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for
|
||||
capture (recording) of audio. This is typically dictated
|
||||
by SOC design. See the notes below.
|
||||
|
||||
Optional properties:
|
||||
- codec-handle : phandle to a 'codec' node that defines an audio
|
||||
@ -36,3 +42,20 @@ Child 'codec' node required properties:
|
||||
Child 'codec' node optional properties:
|
||||
- clock-frequency : The frequency of the input clock, which typically
|
||||
comes from an on-board dedicated oscillator.
|
||||
|
||||
Notes on fsl,playback-dma and fsl,capture-dma:
|
||||
|
||||
On SOCs that have an SSI, specific DMA channels are hard-wired for playback
|
||||
and capture. On the MPC8610, for example, SSI1 must use DMA channel 0 for
|
||||
playback and DMA channel 1 for capture. SSI2 must use DMA channel 2 for
|
||||
playback and DMA channel 3 for capture. The developer can choose which
|
||||
DMA controller to use, but the channels themselves are hard-wired. The
|
||||
purpose of these two properties is to represent this hardware design.
|
||||
|
||||
The device tree nodes for the DMA channels that are referenced by
|
||||
"fsl,playback-dma" and "fsl,capture-dma" must be marked as compatible with
|
||||
"fsl,ssi-dma-channel". The SOC-specific compatible string (e.g.
|
||||
"fsl,mpc8610-dma-channel") can remain. If these nodes are left as
|
||||
"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel", then the generic Elo DMA
|
||||
drivers (fsldma) will attempt to use them, and it will conflict with the
|
||||
sound drivers.
|
||||
|
@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
|
||||
Information about /proc/ppc_htab
|
||||
=====================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
This document and the related code was written by me (Cort Dougan), please
|
||||
email me (cort@fsmlabs.com) if you have questions, comments or corrections.
|
||||
|
||||
Last Change: 2.16.98
|
||||
|
||||
This entry in the proc directory is readable by all users but only
|
||||
writable by root.
|
||||
|
||||
The ppc_htab interface is a user level way of accessing the
|
||||
performance monitoring registers as well as providing information
|
||||
about the PTE hash table.
|
||||
|
||||
1. Reading
|
||||
|
||||
Reading this file will give you information about the memory management
|
||||
hash table that serves as an extended tlb for page translation on the
|
||||
powerpc. It will also give you information about performance measurement
|
||||
specific to the cpu that you are using.
|
||||
|
||||
Explanation of the 604 Performance Monitoring Fields:
|
||||
MMCR0 - the current value of the MMCR0 register
|
||||
PMC1
|
||||
PMC2 - the value of the performance counters and a
|
||||
description of what events they are counting
|
||||
which are based on MMCR0 bit settings.
|
||||
Explanation of the PTE Hash Table fields:
|
||||
|
||||
Size - hash table size in Kb.
|
||||
Buckets - number of buckets in the table.
|
||||
Address - the virtual kernel address of the hash table base.
|
||||
Entries - the number of ptes that can be stored in the hash table.
|
||||
User/Kernel - how many pte's are in use by the kernel or user at that time.
|
||||
Overflows - How many of the entries are in their secondary hash location.
|
||||
Percent full - ratio of free pte entries to in use entries.
|
||||
Reloads - Count of how many hash table misses have occurred
|
||||
that were fixed with a reload from the linux tables.
|
||||
Should always be 0 on 603 based machines.
|
||||
Non-error Misses - Count of how many hash table misses have occurred
|
||||
that were completed with the creation of a pte in the linux
|
||||
tables with a call to do_page_fault().
|
||||
Error Misses - Number of misses due to errors such as bad address
|
||||
and permission violations. This includes kernel access of
|
||||
bad user addresses that are fixed up by the trap handler.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that calculation of the data displayed from /proc/ppc_htab takes
|
||||
a long time and spends a great deal of time in the kernel. It would
|
||||
be quite hard on performance to read this file constantly. In time
|
||||
there may be a counter in the kernel that allows successive reads from
|
||||
this file only after a given amount of time has passed to reduce the
|
||||
possibility of a user slowing the system by reading this file.
|
||||
|
||||
2. Writing
|
||||
|
||||
Writing to the ppc_htab allows you to change the characteristics of
|
||||
the powerpc PTE hash table and setup performance monitoring.
|
||||
|
||||
Resizing the PTE hash table is not enabled right now due to many
|
||||
complications with moving the hash table, rehashing the entries
|
||||
and many many SMP issues that would have to be dealt with.
|
||||
|
||||
Write options to ppc_htab:
|
||||
|
||||
- To set the size of the hash table to 64Kb:
|
||||
|
||||
echo 'size 64' > /proc/ppc_htab
|
||||
|
||||
The size must be a multiple of 64 and must be greater than or equal to
|
||||
64.
|
||||
|
||||
- To turn off performance monitoring:
|
||||
|
||||
echo 'off' > /proc/ppc_htab
|
||||
|
||||
- To reset the counters without changing what they're counting:
|
||||
|
||||
echo 'reset' > /proc/ppc_htab
|
||||
|
||||
Note that counting will continue after the reset if it is enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
- To count only events in user mode or only in kernel mode:
|
||||
|
||||
echo 'user' > /proc/ppc_htab
|
||||
...or...
|
||||
echo 'kernel' > /proc/ppc_htab
|
||||
|
||||
Note that these two options are exclusive of one another and the
|
||||
lack of either of these options counts user and kernel.
|
||||
Using 'reset' and 'off' reset these flags.
|
||||
|
||||
- The 604 has 2 performance counters which can each count events from
|
||||
a specific set of events. These sets are disjoint so it is not
|
||||
possible to count _any_ combination of 2 events. One event can
|
||||
be counted by PMC1 and one by PMC2.
|
||||
|
||||
To start counting a particular event use:
|
||||
|
||||
echo 'event' > /proc/ppc_htab
|
||||
|
||||
and choose from these events:
|
||||
|
||||
PMC1
|
||||
----
|
||||
'ic miss' - instruction cache misses
|
||||
'dtlb' - data tlb misses (not hash table misses)
|
||||
|
||||
PMC2
|
||||
----
|
||||
'dc miss' - data cache misses
|
||||
'itlb' - instruction tlb misses (not hash table misses)
|
||||
'load miss time' - cycles to complete a load miss
|
||||
|
||||
3. Bugs
|
||||
|
||||
The PMC1 and PMC2 counters can overflow and give no indication of that
|
||||
in /proc/ppc_htab.
|
@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
|
||||
Information about Linux/PPC SMP mode
|
||||
=====================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
This document and the related code was written by me
|
||||
(Cort Dougan, cort@fsmlabs.com) please email me if you have questions,
|
||||
comments or corrections.
|
||||
|
||||
Last Change: 3.31.99
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to help by writing code or testing different hardware please
|
||||
email me!
|
||||
|
||||
1. State of Supported Hardware
|
||||
|
||||
PowerSurge Architecture - tested on UMAX s900, Apple 9600
|
||||
The second processor on this machine boots up just fine and
|
||||
enters its idle loop. Hopefully a completely working SMP kernel
|
||||
on this machine will be done shortly.
|
||||
|
||||
The code makes the assumption of only two processors. The changes
|
||||
necessary to work with any number would not be overly difficult but
|
||||
I don't have any machines with >2 processors so it's not high on my
|
||||
list of priorities. If anyone else would like do to the work email
|
||||
me and I can point out the places that need changed. If you have >2
|
||||
processors and don't want to add support yourself let me know and I
|
||||
can take a look into it.
|
||||
|
||||
BeBox
|
||||
BeBox support hasn't been added to the 2.1.X kernels from 2.0.X
|
||||
but work is being done and SMP support for BeBox is in the works.
|
||||
|
||||
CHRP
|
||||
CHRP SMP works and is fairly solid. It's been tested on the IBM F50
|
||||
with 4 processors for quite some time now.
|
@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ i. Function reordering so that inline functions are defined before they
|
||||
megaraid_mbox_prepare_pthru, megaraid_mbox_prepare_epthru,
|
||||
megaraid_busywait_mbox
|
||||
|
||||
- Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004
|
||||
- Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004
|
||||
linux-scsi mailing list
|
||||
|
||||
"Something else to clean up after inclusion: every instance of an
|
||||
@ -471,13 +471,13 @@ vi. Add support for 64-bit applications. Current drivers assume only
|
||||
vii. Move the function declarations for the management module from
|
||||
megaraid_mm.h to megaraid_mm.c
|
||||
|
||||
- Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004
|
||||
- Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004
|
||||
linux-scsi mailing list
|
||||
|
||||
viii. Change default values for MEGARAID_NEWGEN, MEGARAID_MM, and
|
||||
MEGARAID_MAILBOX to 'n' in Kconfig.megaraid
|
||||
|
||||
- Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004
|
||||
- Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004
|
||||
linux-scsi mailing list
|
||||
|
||||
ix. replace udelay with msleep
|
||||
|
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration
|
||||
information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in
|
||||
"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver
|
||||
will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave
|
||||
device.
|
||||
device. All fields are optional.
|
||||
|
||||
struct pxa2xx_spi_chip {
|
||||
u8 tx_threshold;
|
||||
@ -112,14 +112,17 @@ used to configure the SSP hardware fifo. These fields are critical to the
|
||||
performance of pxa2xx_spi driver and misconfiguration will result in rx
|
||||
fifo overruns (especially in PIO mode transfers). Good default values are
|
||||
|
||||
.tx_threshold = 12,
|
||||
.rx_threshold = 4,
|
||||
.tx_threshold = 8,
|
||||
.rx_threshold = 8,
|
||||
|
||||
The range is 1 to 16 where zero indicates "use default".
|
||||
|
||||
The "pxa2xx_spi_chip.dma_burst_size" field is used to configure PXA2xx DMA
|
||||
engine and is related the "spi_device.bits_per_word" field. Read and understand
|
||||
the PXA2xx "Developer Manual" sections on the DMA controller and SSP Controllers
|
||||
to determine the correct value. An SSP configured for byte-wide transfers would
|
||||
use a value of 8.
|
||||
use a value of 8. The driver will determine a reasonable default if
|
||||
dma_burst_size == 0.
|
||||
|
||||
The "pxa2xx_spi_chip.timeout" fields is used to efficiently handle
|
||||
trailing bytes in the SSP receiver fifo. The correct value for this field is
|
||||
@ -137,7 +140,13 @@ function for asserting/deasserting a slave device chip select. If the field is
|
||||
NULL, the pxa2xx_spi master controller driver assumes that the SSP port is
|
||||
configured to use SSPFRM instead.
|
||||
|
||||
NSSP SALVE SAMPLE
|
||||
NOTE: the SPI driver cannot control the chip select if SSPFRM is used, so the
|
||||
chipselect is dropped after each spi_transfer. Most devices need chip select
|
||||
asserted around the complete message. Use SSPFRM as a GPIO (through cs_control)
|
||||
to accomodate these chips.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NSSP SLAVE SAMPLE
|
||||
-----------------
|
||||
The pxa2xx_spi_chip structure is passed to the pxa2xx_spi driver in the
|
||||
"spi_board_info.controller_data" field. Below is a sample configuration using
|
||||
@ -206,18 +215,21 @@ static void __init streetracer_init(void)
|
||||
|
||||
DMA and PIO I/O Support
|
||||
-----------------------
|
||||
The pxa2xx_spi driver support both DMA and interrupt driven PIO message
|
||||
transfers. The driver defaults to PIO mode and DMA transfers must enabled by
|
||||
setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_master" structure and
|
||||
ensuring that the "pxa2xx_spi_chip.dma_burst_size" field is non-zero. The DMA
|
||||
mode support both coherent and stream based DMA mappings.
|
||||
The pxa2xx_spi driver supports both DMA and interrupt driven PIO message
|
||||
transfers. The driver defaults to PIO mode and DMA transfers must be enabled
|
||||
by setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_master" structure. The DMA
|
||||
mode supports both coherent and stream based DMA mappings.
|
||||
|
||||
The following logic is used to determine the type of I/O to be used on
|
||||
a per "spi_transfer" basis:
|
||||
|
||||
if !enable_dma or dma_burst_size == 0 then
|
||||
if !enable_dma then
|
||||
always use PIO transfers
|
||||
|
||||
if spi_message.len > 8191 then
|
||||
print "rate limited" warning
|
||||
use PIO transfers
|
||||
|
||||
if spi_message.is_dma_mapped and rx_dma_buf != 0 and tx_dma_buf != 0 then
|
||||
use coherent DMA mode
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -369,4 +369,5 @@ can be ORed together:
|
||||
2 - A module was force loaded by insmod -f.
|
||||
Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools.
|
||||
4 - Unsafe SMP processors: SMP with CPUs not designed for SMP.
|
||||
64 - A module from drivers/staging was loaded.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -52,6 +52,11 @@ Therefore no guarantee is made that the URBs have been unlinked when
|
||||
the call returns. They may be unlinked later but will be unlinked in
|
||||
finite time.
|
||||
|
||||
usb_scuttle_anchored_urbs()
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
All URBs of an anchor are unanchored en masse.
|
||||
|
||||
usb_wait_anchor_empty_timeout()
|
||||
-------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
@ -59,4 +64,16 @@ This function waits for all URBs associated with an anchor to finish
|
||||
or a timeout, whichever comes first. Its return value will tell you
|
||||
whether the timeout was reached.
|
||||
|
||||
usb_anchor_empty()
|
||||
------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Returns true if no URBs are associated with an anchor. Locking
|
||||
is the caller's responsibility.
|
||||
|
||||
usb_get_from_anchor()
|
||||
---------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the oldest anchored URB of an anchor. The URB is unanchored
|
||||
and returned with a reference. As you may mix URBs to several
|
||||
destinations in one anchor you have no guarantee the chronologically
|
||||
first submitted URB is returned.
|
46
Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt
Normal file
46
Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
|
||||
USB 7-Segment Numeric Display
|
||||
Manufactured by Delcom Engineering
|
||||
|
||||
Device Information
|
||||
------------------
|
||||
USB VENDOR_ID 0x0fc5
|
||||
USB PRODUCT_ID 0x1227
|
||||
Both the 6 character and 8 character displays have PRODUCT_ID,
|
||||
and according to Delcom Engineering no queryable information
|
||||
can be obtained from the device to tell them apart.
|
||||
|
||||
Device Modes
|
||||
------------
|
||||
By default, the driver assumes the display is only 6 characters
|
||||
The mode for 6 characters is:
|
||||
MSB 0x06; LSB 0x3f
|
||||
For the 8 character display:
|
||||
MSB 0x08; LSB 0xff
|
||||
The device can accept "text" either in raw, hex, or ascii textmode.
|
||||
raw controls each segment manually,
|
||||
hex expects a value between 0-15 per character,
|
||||
ascii expects a value between '0'-'9' and 'A'-'F'.
|
||||
The default is ascii.
|
||||
|
||||
Device Operation
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
1. Turn on the device:
|
||||
echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/.../powered
|
||||
2. Set the device's mode:
|
||||
echo $mode_msb > /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_msb
|
||||
echo $mode_lsb > /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_lsb
|
||||
3. Set the textmode:
|
||||
echo $textmode > /sys/bus/usb/.../textmode
|
||||
4. set the text (for example):
|
||||
echo "123ABC" > /sys/bus/usb/.../text (ascii)
|
||||
echo "A1B2" > /sys/bus/usb/.../text (ascii)
|
||||
echo -ne "\x01\x02\x03" > /sys/bus/usb/.../text (hex)
|
||||
5. Set the decimal places.
|
||||
The device has either 6 or 8 decimal points.
|
||||
to set the nth decimal place calculate 10 ** n
|
||||
and echo it in to /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals
|
||||
To set multiple decimals points sum up each power.
|
||||
For example, to set the 0th and 3rd decimal place
|
||||
echo 1001 > /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -350,12 +350,12 @@ without holding the mutex.
|
||||
|
||||
There also are a couple of utility routines drivers can use:
|
||||
|
||||
usb_autopm_enable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 1 and then calls
|
||||
usb_autopm_set_interface(), which will attempt an autoresume.
|
||||
|
||||
usb_autopm_disable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 0 and then calls
|
||||
usb_autopm_enable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 0 and then calls
|
||||
usb_autopm_set_interface(), which will attempt an autosuspend.
|
||||
|
||||
usb_autopm_disable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 1 and then calls
|
||||
usb_autopm_set_interface(), which will attempt an autoresume.
|
||||
|
||||
The conventional usage pattern is that a driver calls
|
||||
usb_autopm_get_interface() in its open routine and
|
||||
usb_autopm_put_interface() in its close or release routine. But
|
||||
|
@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
|
||||
0 -> Unknown board (au0828)
|
||||
1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q (au0828) [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008]
|
||||
1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q (au0828) [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721e,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008]
|
||||
2 -> Hauppauge HVR850 (au0828) [2040:7240]
|
||||
3 -> DViCO FusionHDTV USB (au0828) [0fe9:d620]
|
||||
4 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q rev xxF8 (au0828) [2040:7201,2040:7211,2040:7281]
|
||||
|
@ -150,3 +150,4 @@
|
||||
149 -> Typhoon TV-Tuner PCI (50684)
|
||||
150 -> Geovision GV-600 [008a:763c]
|
||||
151 -> Kozumi KTV-01C
|
||||
152 -> Encore ENL TV-FM-2 [1000:1801]
|
||||
|
@ -9,3 +9,5 @@
|
||||
8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700 [0070:8101]
|
||||
9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010]
|
||||
10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618]
|
||||
11 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express [18ac:db78]
|
||||
12 -> Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H [107d:6681]
|
||||
|
@ -66,3 +66,11 @@
|
||||
65 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 7 Gold [18ac:d610]
|
||||
66 -> Prolink Pixelview MPEG 8000GT [1554:4935]
|
||||
67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1]
|
||||
68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902]
|
||||
69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906]
|
||||
70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [d460:9022]
|
||||
71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI [A044:2011]
|
||||
72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888]
|
||||
73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022]
|
||||
74 -> Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme [1554:4976]
|
||||
75 -> PROF 7300 DVB-S/S2 [B033:3033]
|
||||
|
@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
|
||||
0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800]
|
||||
1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883]
|
||||
1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883]
|
||||
2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036]
|
||||
3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208]
|
||||
4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201]
|
||||
@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
|
||||
11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042]
|
||||
12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840)
|
||||
13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047]
|
||||
14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840)
|
||||
14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2821]
|
||||
15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800)
|
||||
16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f]
|
||||
17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227]
|
||||
|
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
|
||||
75 -> AVerMedia AVerTVHD MCE A180 [1461:1044]
|
||||
76 -> SKNet MonsterTV Mobile [1131:4ee9]
|
||||
77 -> Pinnacle PCTV 40i/50i/110i (saa7133) [11bd:002e]
|
||||
78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862,1043:4857]
|
||||
78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862]
|
||||
79 -> Sedna/MuchTV PC TV Cardbus TV/Radio (ITO25 Rev:2B)
|
||||
80 -> ASUS Digimatrix TV [1043:0210]
|
||||
81 -> Philips Tiger reference design [1131:2018]
|
||||
@ -145,3 +145,9 @@
|
||||
144 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 Extra [5ace:6193]
|
||||
145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636]
|
||||
146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog
|
||||
147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878]
|
||||
148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008]
|
||||
149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d]
|
||||
150 -> Zogis Real Angel 220
|
||||
151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV [1421:0380]
|
||||
152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00 [1043:4857]
|
||||
|
@ -74,3 +74,5 @@ tuner=72 - Thomson FE6600
|
||||
tuner=73 - Samsung TCPG 6121P30A
|
||||
tuner=75 - Philips TEA5761 FM Radio
|
||||
tuner=76 - Xceive 5000 tuner
|
||||
tuner=77 - TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E
|
||||
tuner=78 - Philips FMD1216MEX MK3 Hybrid Tuner
|
||||
|
@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ The modules are:
|
||||
xxxx vend:prod
|
||||
----
|
||||
spca501 0000:0000 MystFromOri Unknow Camera
|
||||
m5602 0402:5602 ALi Video Camera Controller
|
||||
spca501 040a:0002 Kodak DVC-325
|
||||
spca500 040a:0300 Kodak EZ200
|
||||
zc3xx 041e:041e Creative WebCam Live!
|
||||
@ -42,6 +43,7 @@ zc3xx 0458:7007 Genius VideoCam V2
|
||||
zc3xx 0458:700c Genius VideoCam V3
|
||||
zc3xx 0458:700f Genius VideoCam Web V2
|
||||
sonixj 0458:7025 Genius Eye 311Q
|
||||
sonixj 0458:702e Genius Slim 310 NB
|
||||
sonixj 045e:00f5 MicroSoft VX3000
|
||||
sonixj 045e:00f7 MicroSoft VX1000
|
||||
ov519 045e:028c Micro$oft xbox cam
|
||||
@ -81,7 +83,7 @@ spca561 046d:092b Labtec Webcam Plus
|
||||
spca561 046d:092c Logitech QC chat Elch2
|
||||
spca561 046d:092d Logitech QC Elch2
|
||||
spca561 046d:092e Logitech QC Elch2
|
||||
spca561 046d:092f Logitech QC Elch2
|
||||
spca561 046d:092f Logitech QuickCam Express Plus
|
||||
sunplus 046d:0960 Logitech ClickSmart 420
|
||||
sunplus 0471:0322 Philips DMVC1300K
|
||||
zc3xx 0471:0325 Philips SPC 200 NC
|
||||
@ -96,6 +98,29 @@ sunplus 04a5:3003 Benq DC 1300
|
||||
sunplus 04a5:3008 Benq DC 1500
|
||||
sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC 3410
|
||||
spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC 1016
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0104 Fujifilm FinePix 4800
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0109 Fujifilm FinePix A202
|
||||
finepix 04cb:010b Fujifilm FinePix A203
|
||||
finepix 04cb:010f Fujifilm FinePix A204
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0111 Fujifilm FinePix A205
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0113 Fujifilm FinePix A210
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0115 Fujifilm FinePix A303
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0117 Fujifilm FinePix A310
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0119 Fujifilm FinePix F401
|
||||
finepix 04cb:011b Fujifilm FinePix F402
|
||||
finepix 04cb:011d Fujifilm FinePix F410
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0121 Fujifilm FinePix F601
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0123 Fujifilm FinePix F700
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0125 Fujifilm FinePix M603
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0127 Fujifilm FinePix S300
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0129 Fujifilm FinePix S304
|
||||
finepix 04cb:012b Fujifilm FinePix S500
|
||||
finepix 04cb:012d Fujifilm FinePix S602
|
||||
finepix 04cb:012f Fujifilm FinePix S700
|
||||
finepix 04cb:0131 Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
|
||||
finepix 04cb:013b Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
|
||||
finepix 04cb:013d Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
|
||||
finepix 04cb:013f Fujifilm FinePix F420
|
||||
sunplus 04f1:1001 JVC GC A50
|
||||
spca561 04fc:0561 Flexcam 100
|
||||
sunplus 04fc:500c Sunplus CA500C
|
||||
@ -181,6 +206,7 @@ pac207 093a:2468 PAC207
|
||||
pac207 093a:2470 Genius GF112
|
||||
pac207 093a:2471 Genius VideoCam ge111
|
||||
pac207 093a:2472 Genius VideoCam ge110
|
||||
pac207 093a:2476 Genius e-Messenger 112
|
||||
pac7311 093a:2600 PAC7311 Typhoon
|
||||
pac7311 093a:2601 Philips SPC 610 NC
|
||||
pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312
|
||||
|
12
Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt
Normal file
12
Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
|
||||
This document describes the ALi m5602 bridge connected
|
||||
to the following supported sensors:
|
||||
OmniVision OV9650,
|
||||
Samsung s5k83a,
|
||||
Samsung s5k4aa,
|
||||
Micron mt9m111,
|
||||
Pixel plus PO1030
|
||||
|
||||
This driver mimics the windows drivers, which have a braindead implementation sending bayer-encoded frames at VGA resolution.
|
||||
In a perfect world we should be able to reprogram the m5602 and the connected sensor in hardware instead, supporting a range of resolutions and pixelformats
|
||||
|
||||
Anyway, have fun and please report any bugs to m560x-driver-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
|
120
Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
Normal file
120
Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
|
||||
Soc-Camera Subsystem
|
||||
====================
|
||||
|
||||
Terminology
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
The following terms are used in this document:
|
||||
- camera / camera device / camera sensor - a video-camera sensor chip, capable
|
||||
of connecting to a variety of systems and interfaces, typically uses i2c for
|
||||
control and configuration, and a parallel or a serial bus for data.
|
||||
- camera host - an interface, to which a camera is connected. Typically a
|
||||
specialised interface, present on many SoCs, e.g., PXA27x and PXA3xx, SuperH,
|
||||
AVR32, i.MX27, i.MX31.
|
||||
- camera host bus - a connection between a camera host and a camera. Can be
|
||||
parallel or serial, consists of data and control lines, e.g., clock, vertical
|
||||
and horizontal synchronization signals.
|
||||
|
||||
Purpose of the soc-camera subsystem
|
||||
-----------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
The soc-camera subsystem provides a unified API between camera host drivers and
|
||||
camera sensor drivers. It implements a V4L2 interface to the user, currently
|
||||
only the mmap method is supported.
|
||||
|
||||
This subsystem has been written to connect drivers for System-on-Chip (SoC)
|
||||
video capture interfaces with drivers for CMOS camera sensor chips to enable
|
||||
the reuse of sensor drivers with various hosts. The subsystem has been designed
|
||||
to support multiple camera host interfaces and multiple cameras per interface,
|
||||
although most applications have only one camera sensor.
|
||||
|
||||
Existing drivers
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
|
||||
As of 2.6.27-rc4 there are two host drivers in the mainline: pxa_camera.c for
|
||||
PXA27x SoCs and sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c for SuperH SoCs, and four sensor drivers:
|
||||
mt9m001.c, mt9m111.c, mt9v022.c and a generic soc_camera_platform.c driver. This
|
||||
list is not supposed to be updated, look for more examples in your tree.
|
||||
|
||||
Camera host API
|
||||
---------------
|
||||
|
||||
A host camera driver is registered using the
|
||||
|
||||
soc_camera_host_register(struct soc_camera_host *);
|
||||
|
||||
function. The host object can be initialized as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
static struct soc_camera_host pxa_soc_camera_host = {
|
||||
.drv_name = PXA_CAM_DRV_NAME,
|
||||
.ops = &pxa_soc_camera_host_ops,
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
All camera host methods are passed in a struct soc_camera_host_ops:
|
||||
|
||||
static struct soc_camera_host_ops pxa_soc_camera_host_ops = {
|
||||
.owner = THIS_MODULE,
|
||||
.add = pxa_camera_add_device,
|
||||
.remove = pxa_camera_remove_device,
|
||||
.suspend = pxa_camera_suspend,
|
||||
.resume = pxa_camera_resume,
|
||||
.set_fmt_cap = pxa_camera_set_fmt_cap,
|
||||
.try_fmt_cap = pxa_camera_try_fmt_cap,
|
||||
.init_videobuf = pxa_camera_init_videobuf,
|
||||
.reqbufs = pxa_camera_reqbufs,
|
||||
.poll = pxa_camera_poll,
|
||||
.querycap = pxa_camera_querycap,
|
||||
.try_bus_param = pxa_camera_try_bus_param,
|
||||
.set_bus_param = pxa_camera_set_bus_param,
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
.add and .remove methods are called when a sensor is attached to or detached
|
||||
from the host, apart from performing host-internal tasks they shall also call
|
||||
sensor driver's .init and .release methods respectively. .suspend and .resume
|
||||
methods implement host's power-management functionality and its their
|
||||
responsibility to call respective sensor's methods. .try_bus_param and
|
||||
.set_bus_param are used to negotiate physical connection parameters between the
|
||||
host and the sensor. .init_videobuf is called by soc-camera core when a
|
||||
video-device is opened, further video-buffer management is implemented completely
|
||||
by the specific camera host driver. The rest of the methods are called from
|
||||
respective V4L2 operations.
|
||||
|
||||
Camera API
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
Sensor drivers can use struct soc_camera_link, typically provided by the
|
||||
platform, and used to specify to which camera host bus the sensor is connected,
|
||||
and arbitrarily provide platform .power and .reset methods for the camera.
|
||||
soc_camera_device_register() and soc_camera_device_unregister() functions are
|
||||
used to add a sensor driver to or remove one from the system. The registration
|
||||
function takes a pointer to struct soc_camera_device as the only parameter.
|
||||
This struct can be initialized as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
/* link to driver operations */
|
||||
icd->ops = &mt9m001_ops;
|
||||
/* link to the underlying physical (e.g., i2c) device */
|
||||
icd->control = &client->dev;
|
||||
/* window geometry */
|
||||
icd->x_min = 20;
|
||||
icd->y_min = 12;
|
||||
icd->x_current = 20;
|
||||
icd->y_current = 12;
|
||||
icd->width_min = 48;
|
||||
icd->width_max = 1280;
|
||||
icd->height_min = 32;
|
||||
icd->height_max = 1024;
|
||||
icd->y_skip_top = 1;
|
||||
/* camera bus ID, typically obtained from platform data */
|
||||
icd->iface = icl->bus_id;
|
||||
|
||||
struct soc_camera_ops provides .probe and .remove methods, which are called by
|
||||
the soc-camera core, when a camera is matched against or removed from a camera
|
||||
host bus, .init, .release, .suspend, and .resume are called from the camera host
|
||||
driver as discussed above. Other members of this struct provide respective V4L2
|
||||
functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
struct soc_camera_device also links to an array of struct soc_camera_data_format,
|
||||
listing pixel formats, supported by the camera.
|
||||
|
||||
--
|
||||
Author: Guennadi Liakhovetski <g.liakhovetski@gmx.de>
|
@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
00-INDEX
|
||||
- This file
|
||||
slaves/
|
||||
- Drivers that provide support for specific family codes.
|
||||
masters/
|
||||
- Individual chips providing 1-wire busses.
|
||||
w1.generic
|
||||
|
@ -16,3 +16,55 @@ which allows to build USB <-> W1 bridges.
|
||||
DS9490(R) is a USB <-> W1 bus master device
|
||||
which has 0x81 family ID integrated chip and DS2490
|
||||
low-level operational chip.
|
||||
|
||||
Notes and limitations.
|
||||
- The weak pullup current is a minimum of 0.9mA and maximum of 6.0mA.
|
||||
- The 5V strong pullup is supported with a minimum of 5.9mA and a
|
||||
maximum of 30.4 mA. (From DS2490.pdf)
|
||||
- While the ds2490 supports a hardware search the code doesn't take
|
||||
advantage of it (in tested case it only returned first device).
|
||||
- The hardware will detect when devices are attached to the bus on the
|
||||
next bus (reset?) operation, however only a message is printed as
|
||||
the core w1 code doesn't make use of the information. Connecting
|
||||
one device tends to give multiple new device notifications.
|
||||
- The number of USB bus transactions could be reduced if w1_reset_send
|
||||
was added to the API. The name is just a suggestion. It would take
|
||||
a write buffer and a read buffer (along with sizes) as arguments.
|
||||
The ds2490 block I/O command supports reset, write buffer, read
|
||||
buffer, and strong pullup all in one command, instead of the current
|
||||
1 reset bus, 2 write the match rom command and slave rom id, 3 block
|
||||
write and read data. The write buffer needs to have the match rom
|
||||
command and slave rom id prepended to the front of the requested
|
||||
write buffer, both of which are known to the driver.
|
||||
- The hardware supports normal, flexible, and overdrive bus
|
||||
communication speeds, but only the normal is supported.
|
||||
- The registered w1_bus_master functions don't define error
|
||||
conditions. If a bus search is in progress and the ds2490 is
|
||||
removed it can produce a good amount of error output before the bus
|
||||
search finishes.
|
||||
- The hardware supports detecting some error conditions, such as
|
||||
short, alarming presence on reset, and no presence on reset, but the
|
||||
driver doesn't query those values.
|
||||
- The ds2490 specification doesn't cover short bulk in reads in
|
||||
detail, but my observation is if fewer bytes are requested than are
|
||||
available, the bulk read will return an error and the hardware will
|
||||
clear the entire bulk in buffer. It would be possible to read the
|
||||
maximum buffer size to not run into this error condition, only extra
|
||||
bytes in the buffer is a logic error in the driver. The code should
|
||||
should match reads and writes as well as data sizes. Reads and
|
||||
writes are serialized and the status verifies that the chip is idle
|
||||
(and data is available) before the read is executed, so it should
|
||||
not happen.
|
||||
- Running x86_64 2.6.24 UHCI under qemu 0.9.0 under x86_64 2.6.22-rc6
|
||||
with a OHCI controller, ds2490 running in the guest would operate
|
||||
normally the first time the module was loaded after qemu attached
|
||||
the ds2490 hardware, but if the module was unloaded, then reloaded
|
||||
most of the time one of the bulk out or in, and usually the bulk in
|
||||
would fail. qemu sets a 50ms timeout and the bulk in would timeout
|
||||
even when the status shows data available. A bulk out write would
|
||||
show a successful completion, but the ds2490 status register would
|
||||
show 0 bytes written. Detaching qemu from the ds2490 hardware and
|
||||
reattaching would clear the problem. usbmon output in the guest and
|
||||
host did not explain the problem. My guess is a bug in either qemu
|
||||
or the host OS and more likely the host OS.
|
||||
-- 03-06-2008 David Fries <David@Fries.net>
|
||||
|
4
Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX
Normal file
4
Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
|
||||
00-INDEX
|
||||
- This file
|
||||
w1_therm
|
||||
- The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor ds18*20 temperature sensor.
|
41
Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm
Normal file
41
Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
|
||||
Kernel driver w1_therm
|
||||
====================
|
||||
|
||||
Supported chips:
|
||||
* Maxim ds18*20 based temperature sensors.
|
||||
|
||||
Author: Evgeniy Polyakov <johnpol@2ka.mipt.ru>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Description
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
w1_therm provides basic temperature conversion for ds18*20 devices.
|
||||
supported family codes:
|
||||
W1_THERM_DS18S20 0x10
|
||||
W1_THERM_DS1822 0x22
|
||||
W1_THERM_DS18B20 0x28
|
||||
|
||||
Support is provided through the sysfs w1_slave file. Each open and
|
||||
read sequence will initiate a temperature conversion then provide two
|
||||
lines of ASCII output. The first line contains the nine hex bytes
|
||||
read along with a calculated crc value and YES or NO if it matched.
|
||||
If the crc matched the returned values are retained. The second line
|
||||
displays the retained values along with a temperature in millidegrees
|
||||
Centigrade after t=.
|
||||
|
||||
Parasite powered devices are limited to one slave performing a
|
||||
temperature conversion at a time. If none of the devices are parasite
|
||||
powered it would be possible to convert all the devices at the same
|
||||
time and then go back to read individual sensors. That isn't
|
||||
currently supported. The driver also doesn't support reduced
|
||||
precision (which would also reduce the conversion time).
|
||||
|
||||
The module parameter strong_pullup can be set to 0 to disable the
|
||||
strong pullup or 1 to enable. If enabled the 5V strong pullup will be
|
||||
enabled when the conversion is taking place provided the master driver
|
||||
must support the strong pullup (or it falls back to a pullup
|
||||
resistor). The DS18b20 temperature sensor specification lists a
|
||||
maximum current draw of 1.5mA and that a 5k pullup resistor is not
|
||||
sufficient. The strong pullup is designed to provide the additional
|
||||
current required.
|
@ -79,10 +79,13 @@ w1 master sysfs interface
|
||||
<xx-xxxxxxxxxxxxx> - a directory for a found device. The format is family-serial
|
||||
bus - (standard) symlink to the w1 bus
|
||||
driver - (standard) symlink to the w1 driver
|
||||
w1_master_add - Manually register a slave device
|
||||
w1_master_attempts - the number of times a search was attempted
|
||||
w1_master_max_slave_count
|
||||
- the maximum slaves that may be attached to a master
|
||||
w1_master_name - the name of the device (w1_bus_masterX)
|
||||
w1_master_pullup - 5V strong pullup 0 enabled, 1 disabled
|
||||
w1_master_remove - Manually remove a slave device
|
||||
w1_master_search - the number of searches left to do, -1=continual (default)
|
||||
w1_master_slave_count
|
||||
- the number of slaves found
|
||||
@ -90,7 +93,13 @@ w1_master_slaves - the names of the slaves, one per line
|
||||
w1_master_timeout - the delay in seconds between searches
|
||||
|
||||
If you have a w1 bus that never changes (you don't add or remove devices),
|
||||
you can set w1_master_search to a positive value to disable searches.
|
||||
you can set the module parameter search_count to a small positive number
|
||||
for an initially small number of bus searches. Alternatively it could be
|
||||
set to zero, then manually add the slave device serial numbers by
|
||||
w1_master_add device file. The w1_master_add and w1_master_remove files
|
||||
generally only make sense when searching is disabled, as a search will
|
||||
redetect manually removed devices that are present and timeout manually
|
||||
added devices that aren't on the bus.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
w1 slave sysfs interface
|
||||
|
47
MAINTAINERS
47
MAINTAINERS
@ -72,8 +72,8 @@ M: Mail patches to
|
||||
L: Mailing list that is relevant to this area
|
||||
W: Web-page with status/info
|
||||
T: SCM tree type and location. Type is one of: git, hg, quilt.
|
||||
S: Status, one of the following:
|
||||
F: Applicable files and/or directories
|
||||
S: Status, one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
Supported: Someone is actually paid to look after this.
|
||||
Maintained: Someone actually looks after it.
|
||||
@ -1629,6 +1629,11 @@ P: Christopher Hoover
|
||||
M: ch@murgatroid.com, ch@hpl.hp.com
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
EPSON S1D13XXX FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
|
||||
P: Kristoffer Ericson
|
||||
M: kristoffer.ericson@gmail.com
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
ETHEREXPRESS-16 NETWORK DRIVER
|
||||
P: Philip Blundell
|
||||
M: philb@gnu.org
|
||||
@ -2443,7 +2448,14 @@ S: Supported
|
||||
|
||||
KERNEL VIRTUAL MACHINE (KVM)
|
||||
P: Avi Kivity
|
||||
M: avi@qumranet.com
|
||||
M: avi@redhat.com
|
||||
L: kvm@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
W: http://kvm.qumranet.com
|
||||
S: Supported
|
||||
|
||||
KERNEL VIRTUAL MACHINE (KVM) FOR AMD-V
|
||||
P: Joerg Roedel
|
||||
M: joerg.roedel@amd.com
|
||||
L: kvm@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
W: http://kvm.qumranet.com
|
||||
S: Supported
|
||||
@ -3925,7 +3937,7 @@ M: jbglaw@lug-owl.de
|
||||
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
STABLE BRANCH:
|
||||
STABLE BRANCH
|
||||
P: Greg Kroah-Hartman
|
||||
M: greg@kroah.com
|
||||
P: Chris Wright
|
||||
@ -3933,6 +3945,13 @@ M: chrisw@sous-sol.org
|
||||
L: stable@kernel.org
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
STAGING SUBSYSTEM
|
||||
P: Greg Kroah-Hartman
|
||||
M: gregkh@suse.de
|
||||
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
T: quilt kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
STARFIRE/DURALAN NETWORK DRIVER
|
||||
P: Ion Badulescu
|
||||
M: ionut@cs.columbia.edu
|
||||
@ -4089,7 +4108,7 @@ W: http://tpmdd.sourceforge.net
|
||||
P: Marcel Selhorst
|
||||
M: tpm@selhorst.net
|
||||
W: http://www.prosec.rub.de/tpm/
|
||||
L: tpmdd-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
|
||||
L: tpmdd-devel@lists.sourceforge.net (moderated for non-subscribers)
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
TRIVIAL PATCHES
|
||||
@ -4480,6 +4499,13 @@ W: http://kernel.org/~kzak/util-linux-ng/
|
||||
T: git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/util-linux-ng/util-linux-ng.git
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
UVESAFB DRIVER
|
||||
P: Michal Januszewski
|
||||
M: spock@gentoo.org
|
||||
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net (moderated for non-subscribers)
|
||||
W: http://dev.gentoo.org/~spock/projects/uvesafb/
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
VFAT/FAT/MSDOS FILESYSTEM
|
||||
P: OGAWA Hirofumi
|
||||
M: hirofumi@mail.parknet.co.jp
|
||||
@ -4497,6 +4523,14 @@ M: khali@linux-fr.org
|
||||
L: i2c@lm-sensors.org
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
VIA UNICHROME(PRO)/CHROME9 FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
|
||||
P: Joseph Chan
|
||||
M: JosephChan@via.com.tw
|
||||
P: Scott Fang
|
||||
M: ScottFang@viatech.com.cn
|
||||
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net (moderated for non-subscribers)
|
||||
S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
VIA VELOCITY NETWORK DRIVER
|
||||
P: Francois Romieu
|
||||
M: romieu@fr.zoreil.com
|
||||
@ -4520,10 +4554,11 @@ S: Maintained
|
||||
|
||||
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT REGULATOR FRAMEWORK
|
||||
P: Liam Girdwood
|
||||
M: lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com
|
||||
M: lrg@slimlogic.co.uk
|
||||
P: Mark Brown
|
||||
M: broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com
|
||||
W: http://opensource.wolfsonmicro.com/node/15
|
||||
W: http://www.slimlogic.co.uk/?page_id=5
|
||||
T: git kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/lrg/voltage-2.6.git
|
||||
S: Supported
|
||||
|
||||
@ -4597,7 +4632,7 @@ WM97XX TOUCHSCREEN DRIVERS
|
||||
P: Mark Brown
|
||||
M: broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com
|
||||
P: Liam Girdwood
|
||||
M: liam.girdwood@wolfsonmicro.com
|
||||
M: lrg@slimlogic.co.uk
|
||||
L: linux-input@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
T: git git://opensource.wolfsonmicro.com/linux-2.6-touch
|
||||
W: http://opensource.wolfsonmicro.com/node/7
|
||||
|
18
arch/Kconfig
18
arch/Kconfig
@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ config OPROFILE_IBS
|
||||
If unsure, say N.
|
||||
|
||||
config HAVE_OPROFILE
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
|
||||
config KPROBES
|
||||
bool "Kprobes"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ config KPROBES
|
||||
If in doubt, say "N".
|
||||
|
||||
config HAVE_EFFICIENT_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
help
|
||||
Some architectures are unable to perform unaligned accesses
|
||||
without the use of get_unaligned/put_unaligned. Others are
|
||||
@ -65,13 +65,13 @@ config KRETPROBES
|
||||
depends on KPROBES && HAVE_KRETPROBES
|
||||
|
||||
config HAVE_IOREMAP_PROT
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
|
||||
config HAVE_KPROBES
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
|
||||
config HAVE_KRETPROBES
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
|
||||
#
|
||||
# An arch should select this if it provides all these things:
|
||||
@ -89,16 +89,16 @@ config HAVE_KRETPROBES
|
||||
# signal delivery calls tracehook_signal_handler()
|
||||
#
|
||||
config HAVE_ARCH_TRACEHOOK
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
|
||||
config HAVE_DMA_ATTRS
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
|
||||
config USE_GENERIC_SMP_HELPERS
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
|
||||
config HAVE_CLK
|
||||
def_bool n
|
||||
bool
|
||||
help
|
||||
The <linux/clk.h> calls support software clock gating and
|
||||
thus are a key power management tool on many systems.
|
||||
|
@ -5,6 +5,7 @@
|
||||
config ALPHA
|
||||
bool
|
||||
default y
|
||||
select HAVE_AOUT
|
||||
select HAVE_IDE
|
||||
select HAVE_OPROFILE
|
||||
help
|
||||
@ -68,9 +69,6 @@ config AUTO_IRQ_AFFINITY
|
||||
depends on SMP
|
||||
default y
|
||||
|
||||
config ARCH_SUPPORTS_AOUT
|
||||
def_bool y
|
||||
|
||||
source "init/Kconfig"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -224,8 +222,7 @@ config ALPHA_MIATA
|
||||
bool "Miata"
|
||||
help
|
||||
The Digital PersonalWorkStation (PWS 433a, 433au, 500a, 500au, 600a,
|
||||
or 600au). There is an Installation HOWTO for this hardware at
|
||||
<http://eijk.homelinux.org/~stefan/miata.html>.
|
||||
or 600au).
|
||||
|
||||
config ALPHA_MIKASA
|
||||
bool "Mikasa"
|
||||
|
@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ struct exec
|
||||
Worse, we have to notice the start address before swapping to use
|
||||
/sbin/loader, which of course is _not_ a TASO application. */
|
||||
#define SET_AOUT_PERSONALITY(BFPM, EX) \
|
||||
set_personality (((BFPM->sh_bang || EX.ah.entry < 0x100000000L \
|
||||
set_personality (((BFPM->taso || EX.ah.entry < 0x100000000L \
|
||||
? ADDR_LIMIT_32BIT : 0) | PER_OSF4))
|
||||
|
||||
#endif /* __KERNEL__ */
|
||||
|
@ -144,9 +144,9 @@ extern int dump_elf_task_fp(elf_fpreg_t *dest, struct task_struct *task);
|
||||
: amask (AMASK_CIX) ? "ev6" : "ev67"); \
|
||||
})
|
||||
|
||||
#define SET_PERSONALITY(EX, IBCS2) \
|
||||
#define SET_PERSONALITY(EX) \
|
||||
set_personality(((EX).e_flags & EF_ALPHA_32BIT) \
|
||||
? PER_LINUX_32BIT : (IBCS2) ? PER_SVR4 : PER_LINUX)
|
||||
? PER_LINUX_32BIT : PER_LINUX)
|
||||
|
||||
extern int alpha_l1i_cacheshape;
|
||||
extern int alpha_l1d_cacheshape;
|
||||
|
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Loading…
Reference in New Issue
Block a user